FF230003
Owner’s Manual
BL00005311-203
EN
ii
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that
you have read this manual and understood its contents be-
fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be
read by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/
The website can be accessed not only from
your computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on rmware updates, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
iii
P
Chapter Index
1 Before You Begin 1
2 First Steps 35
3 Basic Photography and Playback 51
4 Movie Recording and Playback 59
5 Taking Photographs 67
6 The Shooting Menus 117
7 Playback and the Playback Menu 209
8 Network/USB Features and Settings 237
9 The Setup Menus 269
10 Shortcuts 309
11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 327
12 Technical Notes 343
Menu List
iv
iv
Menu List
Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.
Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.
N
See page 117 for details.
Photo Menus
N
Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
IMAGE SIZE 118
IMAGE QUALITY 119
RAW RECORDING 120
SELECT JPEG/HEIF 121
FILM SIMULATION 122
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 124
GRAIN EFFECT 124
COLOR CHROME EFFECT 125
2⁄3
2⁄3
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE 125
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT 125
WHITE BALANCE 126
DYNAMIC RANGE 130
D RANGE PRIORITY 131
TONE CURVE 132
COLOR 132
SHARPNESS 132
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
3⁄3
3⁄3
HIGH ISO NR 132
CLARITY 133
LONG EXPOSURE NR 133
COLOR SPACE 133
PIXEL MAPPING 134
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
134
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
135
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 141
v
Menu List
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
FOCUS AREA 142
AF MODE 142
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING 142
AF MODE ALL SETTING 142
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 143
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 146
AF POINT DISPLAY
yz
147
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
147
2⁄3
2⁄3
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 147
PRE-AF 148
AF ILLUMINATOR 148
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
149
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING 151
AF+MF 153
MF ASSIST 154
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
154
3⁄3
3⁄3
FOCUS CHECK 155
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 155
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
155
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
156
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 156
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
157
TOUCH SCREEN MODE 158
CORRECTED AF FRAME 160
A SHOOTING SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
SPORTS FINDER MODE 161
PRE-SHOT sJ
162
SELF-TIMER 163
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING 164
SELF-TIMER LAMP 164
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 164
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
166
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE 166
A SHOOTING SETTING
P
2⁄3
2⁄3
AE BKT SETTING 167
FILM SIMULATION BKT 167
FOCUS BKT SETTING 167
PHOTOMETRY 167
SHUTTER TYPE 168
FLICKER REDUCTION 169
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 169
IS MODE 170
3⁄3
3⁄3
ISO AUTO SETTING 170
xF CONVERSION LENS
170
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. 171
xF ND FILTER
171
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
172
F FLASH SETTING
P
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING 173
RED EYE REMOVAL 173
TTL-LOCK MODE 174
LED LIGHT SETTING 174
COMMANDER SETTING 175
CH SETTING 175
Built-In Flash 176
B MOVIE SETTING
P
MOVIE MODE 177
HIGH SPEED REC 177
MEDIA REC SETTING 177
F IS MODE
177
F IS MODE BOOST
177
AUDIO SETTING 178
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE 180
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
180
vi
Menu List
Movie Menus
N
Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
B MOVIE SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
MOVIE SETTING LIST 181
MOVIE MODE 182
HIGH SPEED REC
183
F SELF-TIMER
184
MEDIA REC SETTING
184
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
186
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
186
F-Log/HLG RECORDING 187
2⁄3
2⁄3
DATA LEVEL SETTING 188
F PHOTOMETRY
188
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
188
F IS MODE
189
F IS MODE BOOST
189
ZEBRA SETTING 190
ZEBRA LEVEL 190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
191
3⁄3
3⁄3
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
191
TALLY LIGHT 192
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
193
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
193
F
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
193
xF CONVERSION LENS
193
xF ND FILTER
193
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
193
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
F FILM SIMULATION
194
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
194
F WHITE BALANCE
194
F DYNAMIC RANGE
195
F TONE CURVE
195
F COLOR
195
F SHARPNESS
196
F HIGH ISO NR
196
2⁄2
2⁄2
INTERFRAME NR
196
F
PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
196
vii
Menu List
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
F FOCUS AREA
197
F AF MODE
197
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
198
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
198
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
199
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
199
F AF+MF
200
F MF ASSIST
200
2⁄2
2⁄2
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST &
FOCUS RING
200
F FOCUS CHECK
201
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
201
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
201
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
201
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
202
FOCUS CHECK LOCK 203
P AUDIO SETTING
P
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 204
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 204
MIC JACK SETTING 205
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
205
WIND FILTER 205
LOW CUT FILTER 206
HEADPHONES VOLUME 206
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE 206
Q TIME CODE SETTING
P
TIME CODE DISPLAY 207
START TIME SETTING 207
COUNT UP SETTING 207
DROP FRAME
208
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT 208
viii
Menu List
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
N
See page 216 for details.
C PLAY BACK MENU
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
RAW CONVERSION 216
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION 219
ERASE 220
CROP 222
RESIZE 223
PROTECT 224
IMAGE ROTATE 225
VOICE MEMO SETTING 226
C PLAY BACK MENU
P
2⁄2
2⁄2
RATING 227
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 228
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
230
SLIDE SHOW 230
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST 231
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) 233
instax PRINTER PRINT 234
DISP ASPECT 235
ix
Menu List
Menu List
Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.
N
See page 269 for details.
D USER SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
FORMAT 270
b AREA SETTING
271
DATE/TIME 271
TIME DIFFERENCE 272
Q a
273
x MY MENU SETTING
273
F MY MENU SETTING
273
SENSOR CLEANING 274
2⁄2
2⁄2
SHUTTER COUNT 274
SOUND & FLASH 275
FIRMWARE UPDATE 275
RESET 276
REGULATORY 276
D SOUND SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
AF BEEP VOL. 277
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 277
OPERATION VOL. 278
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
278
t ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
278
t ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
279
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
279
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
279
2⁄2
2⁄2 PLAYBACK VOLUME 280
x
Menu List
D SCREEN SETTING
P
1⁄4
1⁄4
VIEW MODE SETTING 281
BRIGHT FRAME POSITION MEMORY 281
EVF BRIGHTNESS 282
EVF COLOR 282
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 282
LCD BRIGHTNESS 283
LCD COLOR 283
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 283
2⁄4
2⁄4
IMAGE DISP. 284
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 284
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 285
NATURAL LIVE VIEW 285
F-Log VIEW ASSIST 286
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING 286
FRAMING GUIDELINE 286
AUTOROTATE PB 287
D SCREEN SETTING
P
3⁄4
3⁄4
FOCUS SCALE UNITS 287
OVF, IMAGE DISP. 288
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 288
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
(EVF/OVF)
289
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 290
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 291
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 291
LOCATION INFO 292
4⁄4
4⁄4
x
Q MENU BACKGROUND
292
F
Q MENU BACKGROUND
292
xi
Menu List
Menu List
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
FOCUS LEVER SETTING 293
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
294
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
294
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING 294
COMMAND DIAL SETTING 295
o S.S. OPERATION
295
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION 296
SHUTTER AF 296
2⁄3
2⁄3
SHUTTER AE 296
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD 297
FOCUS RING 297
FOCUS RING OPERATION 297
CONTROL RING SETTING 298
AE/AF-LOCK MODE 298
AWB-LOCK MODE 298
APERTURE RING SETTING (A) 299
3⁄3
3⁄3
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
299
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING 300
LOCK 302
D POWER MANAGEMENT
P
AUTO POWER OFF 303
PERFORMANCE 304
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING 304
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. 305
D SAVE DATA SETTING
P
FRAME NO. 306
EDIT FILE NAME 307
SELECT FOLDER 307
COPYRIGHT INFO 307
GEOTAGGING 308
xii
Menu List
Menu List
The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust settings for network and USB connections.
N
See page 261 for details.
I NETWORK/USB SETTING
P
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING 261
AIRPLANE MODE 264
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
264
Frame.io Camera to Cloud 264
CONNECTION MODE 267
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING 268
INFORMATION 268
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING 268
xiii
P
Table of Contents
Introduction ....................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information ................................................................................... ii
Menu List .........................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ........................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu ...............................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...............................................................................................................ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu ..................................................................xii
Supplied Accessories ............................................................................xxvii
About This Manual ................................................................................xxviii
Symbols and Conventions ...........................................................................xxviii
Terminology ..........................................................................................................xxviii
1
Before You Begin 1
Before You Begin 1
Parts of the Camera ......................................................................................2
The View nder Window ........................................................................................4
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................6
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) .............................................................................7
The Shutter Speed Dial/Sensitivity Dial .......................................................7
The Exposure Compensation Dial ...................................................................8
Focusing the View nder........................................................................................8
The DRIVE/DELETE Button ...................................................................................9
The Command Dials .............................................................................................10
The Indicator Lamp ...............................................................................................11
The Control Ring .....................................................................................................12
The Serial Number Plate ..................................................................................... 13
Camera Displays..........................................................................................14
The Optical View nder ........................................................................................ 14
The Electronic View nder .................................................................................. 16
The LCD Monitor .....................................................................................................18
Choosing a Display Mode ................................................................................. 20
Adjusting Display Brightness ...........................................................................22
Display Rotation ......................................................................................................22
The DISP/BACK Button ........................................................................................23
xiv
Customizing Display Indicators .....................................................................25
Virtual Horizon ..........................................................................................................27
Using the Menus ......................................................................................... 28
The Menus ..................................................................................................................28
Selecting a Menu Tab ...........................................................................................29
Touch Screen Mode ................................................................................... 30
Shooting Touch Controls ...................................................................................30
Playback Touch Controls ....................................................................................34
2
First Steps 35
First Steps 35
Attaching the Strap ................................................................................... 36
Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card ......................................... 38
Compatible Memory Cards ..............................................................................41
Charging the Battery .................................................................................42
Turning the Camera On and O ............................................................ 45
Checking the Battery Level ..................................................................... 46
Basic Setup.................................................................................................... 47
Choosing a Di erent Language ....................................................................49
Changing the Time and Date ..........................................................................49
3
Basic Photography and Playback 51
Basic Photography and Playback 51
Taking Photographs (Mode P) ...............................................................52
Viewing Pictures ......................................................................................... 55
HDMI Output .............................................................................................................56
Deleting Pictures ........................................................................................58
xv
Table of Contents
4
Movie Recording and Playback 59
Movie Recording and Playback 59
Recording Movies .......................................................................................60
Adjusting Movie Settings ..................................................................................64
Viewing Movies ........................................................................................... 65
5
Taking Photographs 67
Taking Photographs 67
P, S, A, and M Modes .................................................................................. 68
Mode P: Program AE .............................................................................................68
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE ..............................................................................70
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ..........................................................................74
Mode M: Manual Exposure ...............................................................................75
Autofocus ...................................................................................................... 77
Focus Mode ................................................................................................................78
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ........................................................................80
Focus-Point Selection ..........................................................................................82
Manual Focus ............................................................................................... 86
Checking Focus........................................................................................................88
Sensitivity ...................................................................................................... 91
Auto Sensitivity (A) .................................................................................................92
Metering ........................................................................................................ 93
The Digital Teleconverter ......................................................................... 94
Exposure Compensation ......................................................................... 95
C (Custom) ..................................................................................................................96
Focus/Exposure Lock ................................................................................ 97
Other Controls ..........................................................................................................98
Bracketing ..................................................................................................... 99
W ISO BKT .................................................................................................................. 99
V WHITE BALANCE BKT....................................................................................99
s Bracketing ......................................................................................................... 100
xvi
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) ...................................................103
HDR ................................................................................................................105
Panoramas ..................................................................................................107
Multiple Exposures ..................................................................................110
Advanced Filters .......................................................................................112
Advanced Filter Options .................................................................................. 113
Flash Photography ...................................................................................114
Flash Settings ......................................................................................................... 115
6
The Shooting Menus 117
The Shooting Menus 117
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) ................................118
IMAGE SIZE ............................................................................................................... 118
IMAGE QUALITY .................................................................................................... 119
RAW RECORDING ................................................................................................. 120
SELECT JPEG/HEIF ............................................................................................... 121
FILM SIMULATION ................................................................................................ 122
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR ........................................................................... 124
GRAIN EFFECT ........................................................................................................ 124
COLOR CHROME EFFECT ................................................................................ 125
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ............................................................................... 125
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ...................................................................................... 125
WHITE BALANCE ................................................................................................... 126
DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................. 130
D RANGE PRIORITY.............................................................................................. 131
TONE CURVE ........................................................................................................... 132
COLOR......................................................................................................................... 132
SHARPNESS .............................................................................................................. 132
HIGH ISO NR ............................................................................................................ 132
CLARITY ...................................................................................................................... 133
LONG EXPOSURE NR .......................................................................................... 133
COLOR SPACE ......................................................................................................... 133
PIXEL MAPPING ..................................................................................................... 134
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................................... 134
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................... 135
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................. 141
xvii
Table of Contents
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ...................................................142
FOCUS AREA ........................................................................................................... 142
AF MODE ................................................................................................................... 142
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING ................................................................................. 142
AF MODE ALL SETTING .................................................................................... 142
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ................................................................................ 143
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION ............................................................ 146
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ................................................................................147
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT ............................................................................ 147
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS ......................................................................... 147
PRE-AF......................................................................................................................... 148
AF ILLUMINATOR .................................................................................................. 148
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ........................................................... 149
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .................................................................... 151
AF+MF ........................................................................................................................ 153
MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................. 154
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING .................................................... 154
FOCUS CHECK ........................................................................................................ 155
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA ....................................................... 155
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ........................................................................... 155
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE .................................................................... 156
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ............................................................................. 156
xF AF RANGE LIMITER ................................................................................ 157
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ..................................................................................... 158
CORRECTED AF FRAME .................................................................................... 160
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) ..........................................161
SPORTS FINDER MODE ..................................................................................... 161
PRE-SHOT sJ .................................................................................................... 162
SELF-TIMER ............................................................................................................... 163
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING ............................................................................. 164
SELF-TIMER LAMP ................................................................................................ 164
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING .......................................................................... 164
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING ................. 166
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ............................................................................. 166
AE BKT SETTING .................................................................................................... 167
FILM SIMULATION BKT ...................................................................................... 167
xviii
FOCUS BKT SETTING .......................................................................................... 167
PHOTOMETRY ........................................................................................................ 167
SHUTTER TYPE ....................................................................................................... 168
FLICKER REDUCTION ......................................................................................... 169
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING...............................................................................169
IS MODE ..................................................................................................................... 170
ISO AUTO SETTING .............................................................................................. 170
xF CONVERSION LENS ............................................................................... 170
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. ........................................................................................... 171
xF ND FILTER .................................................................................................... 171
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ......................................................... 172
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ...................................................173
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ........................................................................... 173
RED EYE REMOVAL .............................................................................................. 173
TTL-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 174
LED LIGHT SETTING ............................................................................................ 174
COMMANDER SETTING .................................................................................... 175
CH SETTING ............................................................................................................. 175
Built-In Flash ............................................................................................................ 176
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ..................................................177
MOVIE MODE.......................................................................................................... 177
HIGH SPEED REC ................................................................................................... 177
MEDIA REC SETTING .......................................................................................... 177
F IS MODE .............................................................................................................. 177
F IS MODE BOOST ............................................................................................ 177
AUDIO SETTING ....................................................................................................178
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ...................................................................................... 180
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ............................................................................. 180
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) ...................................................181
MOVIE SETTING LIST .......................................................................................... 181
MOVIE MODE.......................................................................................................... 182
HIGH SPEED REC ................................................................................................... 183
F SELF-TIMER ....................................................................................................... 184
MEDIA REC SETTING .......................................................................................... 184
xix
Table of Contents
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING .................................................................................. 186
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION ............................................................ 186
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ................................................................................... 187
DATA LEVEL SETTING ......................................................................................... 188
F PHOTOMETRY ................................................................................................. 188
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ....................................................................... 188
F IS MODE .............................................................................................................. 189
F IS MODE BOOST ............................................................................................ 189
ZEBRA SETTING ..................................................................................................... 190
ZEBRA LEVEL ........................................................................................................... 190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ......................................................... 191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ............................................................................. 191
TALLY LIGHT ............................................................................................................. 192
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................................... 193
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................... 193
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................... 193
xF CONVERSION LENS ............................................................................... 193
xF ND FILTER .................................................................................................... 193
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ......................................................... 193
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ................................194
F FILM SIMULATION ........................................................................................ 194
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .................................................................... 194
F WHITE BALANCE ............................................................................................ 194
F DYNAMIC RANGE.......................................................................................... 195
F TONE CURVE .................................................................................................... 195
F COLOR ................................................................................................................. 195
F SHARPNESS ...................................................................................................... 196
F HIGH ISO NR ..................................................................................................... 196
INTERFRAME NR .................................................................................................... 196
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ....................................................... 196
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) ...................................................197
F FOCUS AREA .................................................................................................... 197
F AF MODE ........................................................................................................... 197
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................ 198
xx
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT ............................................................................ 198
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .................................................... 199
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ............................................................. 199
F AF+MF ................................................................................................................. 200
F MF ASSIST .......................................................................................................... 200
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING ............................................. 200
F FOCUS CHECK ................................................................................................ 201
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ........................................................................... 201
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE .................................................................... 201
xF AF RANGE LIMITER ................................................................................ 201
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .............................................................................202
FOCUS CHECK LOCK .......................................................................................... 203
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) ...................................................204
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 204
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ....................................................... 204
MIC JACK SETTING .............................................................................................. 205
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .............................................................................................. 205
WIND FILTER ............................................................................................................ 205
LOW CUT FILTER ................................................................................................... 206
HEADPHONES VOLUME ................................................................................... 206
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ...................................................................................... 206
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) ..........................................207
TIME CODE DISPLAY ........................................................................................... 207
START TIME SETTING .......................................................................................... 207
COUNT UP SETTING ........................................................................................... 207
DROP FRAME .......................................................................................................... 208
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ............................................................................ 208
7
Playback and the Playback Menu 209
Playback and the Playback Menu 209
The Playback Display ...............................................................................210
The DISP/BACK Button ..................................................................................... 212
Viewing Pictures .......................................................................................214
Playback Zoom ...................................................................................................... 215
Multi-Frame Playback ........................................................................................ 215
xxi
Table of Contents
The Playback Menu ..................................................................................216
RAW CONVERSION .............................................................................................. 216
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ................................................................ 219
ERASE .......................................................................................................................... 220
CROP ............................................................................................................................ 222
RESIZE ......................................................................................................................... 223
PROTECT .................................................................................................................... 224
IMAGE ROTATE ....................................................................................................... 225
VOICE MEMO SETTING ..................................................................................... 226
RATING ........................................................................................................................ 227
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE ....................................................... 228
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ......................................................... 230
SLIDE SHOW ............................................................................................................ 230
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST .......................................................................................... 231
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ......................................................................................... 233
instax PRINTER PRINT ......................................................................................... 234
DISP ASPECT ........................................................................................................... 235
8
Network/USB Features and Settings 237
Network/USB Features and Settings 237
Overview .....................................................................................................238
Supported Features ............................................................................................ 238
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) ........................................240
Installing Smartphone Apps ......................................................................... 240
Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................................... 240
Using the Smartphone App .......................................................................... 242
Connecting to Smartphones (USB) ....................................................244
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone .......................................................... 244
Connecting the Camera and Computer ............................................... 247
Using the Camera as a Webcam ..........................................................249
instax SHARE Printers ..............................................................................250
Establishing a Connection ............................................................................. 250
Printing Pictures.................................................................................................... 251
xxii
Uploading Files to Frame.io ..................................................................252
Connecting via Wireless LAN ....................................................................... 252
Uploading Items to Frame.io ........................................................................ 256
RAW Processing .........................................................................................259
Saving and Loading Settings ...............................................................260
Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer ............................. 260
Network/USB Setting Menus ...............................................................261
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING .......................................................... 261
AIRPLANE MODE .................................................................................................. 264
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING ................................................. 264
Frame.io Camera to Cloud ............................................................................. 264
CONNECTION MODE ......................................................................................... 267
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .................................................... 268
INFORMATION ........................................................................................................ 268
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING .................................................................. 268
9
The Setup Menus 269
The Setup Menus 269
USER SETTING ............................................................................................270
FORMAT ..................................................................................................................... 270
b AREA SETTING .............................................................................................. 271
DATE/TIME ................................................................................................................ 271
TIME DIFFERENCE ................................................................................................272
Qa ......................................................................................................... 273
x MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................... 273
F MY MENU SETTING ...................................................................................... 273
SENSOR CLEANING ............................................................................................. 274
SHUTTER COUNT ................................................................................................. 274
SOUND & FLASH ................................................................................................... 275
FIRMWARE UPDATE ............................................................................................ 275
RESET ........................................................................................................................... 276
REGULATORY .......................................................................................................... 276
SOUND SETTING .......................................................................................277
AF BEEP VOL. ........................................................................................................... 277
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ....................................................................................... 277
xxiii
Table of Contents
OPERATION VOL. ................................................................................................... 278
F REC START/STOP VOLUME ...................................................................... 278
t ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ......................................................... 278
t ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ........................................................... 279
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ......................................................... 279
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ........................................................... 279
PLAYBACK VOLUME ............................................................................................ 280
SCREEN SETTING.......................................................................................281
VIEW MODE SETTING ........................................................................................281
BRIGHT FRAME POSITION MEMORY ......................................................... 281
EVF BRIGHTNESS................................................................................................... 282
EVF COLOR ............................................................................................................... 282
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................. 282
LCD BRIGHTNESS.................................................................................................. 283
LCD COLOR .............................................................................................................. 283
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................. 283
IMAGE DISP. .............................................................................................................. 284
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS ................................................................................... 284
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ..................................................... 285
NATURAL LIVE VIEW ............................................................................................ 285
F-Log VIEW ASSIST............................................................................................... 286
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING ........................................................................ 286
FRAMING GUIDELINE ......................................................................................... 286
AUTOROTATE PB ................................................................................................... 287
FOCUS SCALE UNITS .......................................................................................... 287
OVF, IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................. 288
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................................... 288
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF/OVF) ..................................................... 289
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ................................................................ 290
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING ............................................................ 291
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. .................................................................. 291
LOCATION INFO .................................................................................................... 292
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ........................................................................... 292
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ........................................................................... 292
xxiv
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING ..........................................................................293
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ..................................................................................... 293
x
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU .......................................................................... 294
F
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU .......................................................................... 294
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ................................................................................. 294
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ............................................................................. 295
o S.S. OPERATION ............................................................................................. 295
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION ....................................................................... 296
SHUTTER AF ............................................................................................................ 296
SHUTTER AE ............................................................................................................ 296
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD .................................................................................. 297
FOCUS RING ............................................................................................................ 297
FOCUS RING OPERATION ................................................................................ 297
CONTROL RING SETTING................................................................................. 298
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ............................................................................................. 298
AWB-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................ 298
APERTURE RING SETTING (A) ........................................................................ 299
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ............................................................................... 299
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ................................................................................ 300
LOCK ............................................................................................................................ 302
POWER MANAGEMENT ..........................................................................303
AUTO POWER OFF ............................................................................................... 303
PERFORMANCE ..................................................................................................... 304
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING ............................................................................... 304
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ................................................................................. 305
SAVE DATA SETTING ................................................................................306
FRAME NO. ............................................................................................................... 306
EDIT FILE NAME ..................................................................................................... 307
SELECT FOLDER .................................................................................................... 307
COPYRIGHT INFO ................................................................................................. 307
GEOTAGGING.......................................................................................................... 308
xxv
Table of Contents
10
Shortcuts 309
Shortcuts 309
Shortcut Options ......................................................................................310
MY MENU ....................................................................................................311
MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................. 311
The Quick Menu ........................................................................................313
The Quick Menu Display ................................................................................. 313
Viewing and Changing Settings................................................................. 315
Editing the Quick Menu ................................................................................... 316
Function Controls .....................................................................................319
The Function Buttons ........................................................................................ 319
Touch-Function Gestures ............................................................................... 324
11
Peripherals and Optional Accessories 327
Peripherals and Optional Accessories 327
Optional Accessories ...............................................................................328
The AR-X100 Adapter Ring ............................................................................ 328
The LH-X100 Lens Hood .................................................................................. 329
PRF-49 and PRF-49S Protective Filters .................................................... 329
Conversion Lenses .............................................................................................. 330
External Flash Units .................................................................................332
Using an External Flash .................................................................................... 333
SYNC TERMINAL .................................................................................................... 334
SHOE MOUNT FLASH ........................................................................................ 335
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) .................................................................................. 338
12
Technical Notes 343
Technical Notes 343
Accessories from Fuji lm .......................................................................344
Software and Services for Use with Your Camera .........................347
Smartphone Apps ............................................................................................... 347
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX .............................. 347
FUJIFILM RAW Converter ................................................................................ 348
Capture One ........................................................................................................... 348
FUJIFILM X Acquire ............................................................................................. 348
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ................................................................................. 349
Frame.io Camera to Cloud ............................................................................. 349
xxvi
Table of Contents
For Your Safety ...........................................................................................350
Product Care ...............................................................................................361
Firmware Updates ....................................................................................362
Downloading Firmware ................................................................................... 362
Updating Firmware.............................................................................................362
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................365
Warning Messages and Displays .........................................................377
Memory Card Capacity ...........................................................................382
Speci cations .............................................................................................383
xxvii
Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:
•
NP-W126S rechargeable battery
•
USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)
•
Lens cap (comes attached to camera)
•
Metal strap clips (× 2)
•
Clip attaching tool
•
Protective covers (× 2)
•
Shoulder strap
•
Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)
O
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use
(P 42).
N
For information on compatible computer software, see “Software and
Services for Use with Your Camera” (P 347).
xxviii
About This Manual
This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X100VI
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O
Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
N
Additional information that may be helpful when using the
product.
P
Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simpli ed,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of
camera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera uses
to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The optical
view nder may be referred to as the “OVF”, electronic view nder
may be referred to as the “EVF”, and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”.
Smartphones and tablets are referred to as “smartphones”.
1
Before You Begin
2
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
A
Fn1 button ..................................................... 319
B
Exposure compensation dial ..................8, 95
C
Shutter button .................................................54
D
ON/OFF switch .................................................45
E
Shutter speed dial/
Sensitivity dial ..........................................7, 91
F
AF-assist illuminator/Self-timer lamp
..............................................................148, 163
G
Hot shoe .........................................................333
H
Microphone ............................................ 60, 204
I
Flash ................................................................114
J
Viewfi nder window
...................................................4, 6, 14, 16, 23
K
Strap eyelet .......................................................36
L
Focus mode selector ......................................78
M
Aperture ring .............................................52, 68
N
Control ring ......................................12, 94, 298
Focus ring ..........................................12, 86, 297
O
Front ring (detachable) ..............................328
P
Lens
Q
Fn2 button .............................................. 12, 319
R
Viewfi nder selector ...........................................4
S
Front command dial ............................ 10, 295
T
Hot shoe cover .............................................. 333
U
Lens cap
18 17
21
20
19
12
97654321 8
16 15 1314
10
11
3
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
43
40
47
35
31
46 45 44
42
41
39 38 37 36 34 33 32
30
29
28272625242322
V
Diopter adjustment control ...........................8
W
Viewfi nder window
...................................................4, 6, 14, 16, 23
X
Eye sensor ............................................................6
Y
DRIVE/DELETE button
.................................................9, 52, 58, 60, 99
Z
AEL (exposure lock)/
AFL (focus lock) button .................... 98, 319
a
Rear command dial ....................10, 214, 295
b
Indicator lamp ....................................... 11, 192
c
Q (quick menu) button ...............................313
d
Connector cover
e
Cable channel cover for DC coupler
f
Battery-chamber cover .................................38
g
Battery-chamber cover latch ......................38
h
PLAY (playback) button ................................55
i
DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 23, 212
x(Bluetooth) button ..................................240
j
MENU/OK button .............................................28
k
Focus stick (focus lever)...................7, 83, 293
l
Tripod mount
m
Speaker .................................................... 65, 280
n
LCD monitor ......................................... 6, 18, 22
Touch screen .................................30, 158, 202
o
Microphone/remote release connector
(⌀2.5mm) ...............................................63, 73
p
USB connector (Type-C) ...............42, 65, 244
q
HDMI Micro connector (Type D) ................56
r
Battery latch ....................................................40
s
Battery chamber .............................................38
t
Memory card slot ............................................38
u
Serial number plate........................................13
4
1
Before You Begin
The View nder Window
Use the view nder selector to switch
between the electronic view nder (EVF)
and the optical view nder (OVF). In addi-
tion, a small electronic range nder (ERF)
window can be displayed in the OVF.
Switching Between the EVF and OVF
To switch between the EVF and OVF, pull
the view nder selector as shown.
EVF OVF
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
12800
1000
12800
N
The camera automatically switches from the OVF to the EVF during
movie recording.
5
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
Turning the ERF On and Off
To turn the ERF on or o , pull the view-
nder selector as shown while the OVF is
displayed.
ERF o ERF on
12800 12800
0
0
N
The ERF is available only when r SINGLE POINT is selected for AF
mode.
The Hybrid (EVF/OVF/ERF) View nder
The features of the di erent displays are described below.
Display
Display
Description
Description
OVF
•
The optical display shows the subject clearly. The subject
is in sharp focus so that their expression is always visible.
•
The OVF shows the area just outside the frame, making it
easier to compose shots.
•
Because the viewfi nder window is a slight distance from
the lens, the area visible in photographs may however
diff er slightly from the display in the viewfi nder due to
parallax.
EVF
•
The EVF off ers 100% frame coverage for increased accura-
cy when composing shots.
•
It can be used to preview depth of fi eld, focus, exposure,
and white balance.
ERF
As for the optical viewfi nder but with a focus preview
window.
6
1
Before You Begin
The LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor can be tilted for eas-
ier viewing, but be careful not to touch
the wires or trap ngers or other objects
behind the monitor. Touching the wires
could cause camera malfunction.
N
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:
•
Touch photography (P 31)
•
Focus area selection (P 30)
•
Function selection (P 33)
•
Movie optimized control oL (P 32)
•
Playback (P 34)
The Eye Sensor
•
The eye sensor may respond to objects other
than your eye or to light shining directly on
the sensor.
•
The eye sensor is not available when the LCD
monitor is tilted.
•
The eye sensor can be disabled using
D SCREEN SET-UP> VIEW MODE SETTING.
Eye sensor
7
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-
cus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.
N
•
To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the cen-
ter of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.
•
Use G AF/MF SETTING> xF WRAP FOCUS POINT to choose
whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the dis-
play or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another.
The Shutter Speed Dial/Sensitivity Dial
Shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the shutter speed dial/
sensitivity dial. Lift and rotate the dial to adjust sensitivity.
Shutter speed Sensitivity
Shutter speed
Sensitivity
8
1
Before You Begin
The Exposure Compensation Dial
Rotate the dial to choose an exposure
compensation amount.
Focusing the View nder
View nder focus can be adjusted by ro-
tating the diopter adjustment control.
9
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The DRIVE/DELETE Button
Pressing the DRIVE/DELETE button displays
the drive-mode menu.
Mode
Mode
P
P
B
B
STILL IMAGE 52
J
J
CH HIGH SPEED BURST
103
O
O
CL LOW SPEED BURST
W
W
ISO BKT 99
V
V
WHITE BALANCE BKT 99
s
s
BKT 100
Mode
Mode
P
P
h
h
HDR 105
j
j
Multiple exposure 110
Adv.
Adv. Adv. MODE
107
112
F
F
MOVIE 60
10
1
Before You Begin
The Command Dials
Rotate or press the command dials to:
Front command dial Rear command dial
Rotate
Rotate
•
Select menu tabs or page
through menus
•
Adjust aperture
1, 2
•
Adjust exposure compensation
2,
5
•
Adjust sensitivity
2, 3
•
View other pictures during
playback
•
Highlight menu items
•
Choose the desired combina-
tion of shutter speed and aper-
ture (program shift)
•
Choose a shutter speed
2
•
Adjust settings in the quick menu
•
Choose the size of the focus frame
•
Zoom in or out in full frame play-
back
•
Zoom in or out in multi-frame
playback
Press
Press
Choose the operation performed
by rotating the front command
dial
2
•
Perform the function assigned
to the DIAL function button
•
Zoom in on the active focus point
4
•
Press and hold to choose the
manual focus mode focus display
4
•
Zoom in on the active focus
point during playback
1 Aperture set to A (auto) and COMMAND selected for D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
APERTURE RING SETTING (A).
2 Can be changed using D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
3 C selected for sensitivity.
4 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button.
5 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C.
N
The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.
11
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Camera status
Camera status
Glows green Focus locked.
Blinks green Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken.
Blinks green and
orange
•
Camera on: Recording pictures. Additional pictures can be
taken.
•
Camera o : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet.
*
Glows orange
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at
this time.
Blinks orange Flash charging; fl ash will not fi re when picture is taken.
Blinks red Lens or memory error.
* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.
N
•
Warnings may also appear in the display.
•
The indicator lamp remains o while your eye is to the view nder.
•
The B MOVIE SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to
choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-
cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
•
The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are o during
interval-timer photography.
12
1
Before You Begin
The Control Ring
Use the control ring for quick access to
camera functions during shooting.
The function assigned to the control ring
can be selected by pressing the control
ring options button (Fn2). Choose from:
•
STANDARD
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
N
The function assigned to the control ring can also be selected using
DBUTTON/DIAL SETTING > CONTROL RING SETTING.
STANDARD
When STANDARD is selected, the function assigned to the con-
trol ring changes with the shooting mode.
Shooting mode
Shooting mode
Function
Function
P, S, A, M/
Multiple Exposure
Digital teleconverter
Advanced Filter Filter selection
Panorama Film simulation
N
Regardless of the option selected, when M (manual) is chosen with the
focus mode selector in shooting mode P, S, A, or M, the control ring can
be used only for manual focus.
13
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,
which provides the CMIITID, serial num-
ber, and other important information.
Serial number plate
14
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
The following are displayed in the view nder (OVF or EVF),
and LCD monitor during shooting.
O
For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Optical View nder
12800
PQ STRUV
aXWYZbcdehi
fgjklm
t
n
q
D
EC
u
v
w
x
FGHIJ LK M
ONBA
r
s
o
p
15
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
A
Flash (TTL) mode .........................................335
B
Out-of-frame indicators ............................331
C
Flash compensation ...................................335
D
Boost mode ...................................................304
E
IS mode
2
.........................................................170
F
Control lock
3
..................................................302
G
Sound and fl ash indicator ........................275
H
ND (Neutral Density) fi lter indicator ......171
I
Depth-of-fi eld preview ...........................74, 88
J
Conversion lens ............................................170
K
Digital teleconverter ...................................171
L
Location data download status
..............................................................240, 308
M
Bluetooth ON/OFF
N
Image transfer status ........................240, 261
O
Frame.io upload progress ..........................252
P
Number of available frames
1
...................382
Q
Image size ......................................................118
R
Image quality................................................119
S
HEIF format ...................................................121
T
Battery level ......................................................46
U
Power supply ....................................................44
V
Touch screen mode .............................. 30, 158
W
Bright frame .....................................................53
X
Virtual horizon .................................................27
Y
Temperature warning ......................... 40, 381
Z
Focus frame ...............................................82, 97
a
Sensitivity ..........................................................91
b
Exposure compensation ...............................95
c
Aperture ...............................................69, 74, 75
d
Distance indicator
2
........................................88
e
Shutter speed .....................................69, 70, 75
f
TTL lock ..................................................174, 323
g
AE lock ...................................................... 98, 298
h
Metering ............................................................93
i
Shooting mode ...............................................68
j
Focus mode
2
....................................................78
k
Focus indicator
2
..............................................79
l
Manual focus indicator
2
........................78, 86
m
AF lock ...................................................... 98, 298
n
Histogram .........................................................26
o
Dynamic range ............................................130
p
D-range priority ...........................................131
q
Film simulation ............................................ 122
r
White balance .............................................. 126
s
AWB lock ........................................................298
t
Exposure indicator ...................................75, 95
u
AF+MF indicator
2
........................................153
v
Shutter type ...................................................168
w
Continuous mode ........................................103
x
Self-timer indicator ............................163, 184
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF/OVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
16
1
Before You Begin
The Electronic View nder
00:00:00:0000:00:00:00
N OB C P Q R S T U XY Za b
I
FDE GH
JKLM V W
c
d
e
g
h
f
i
kl jmnop
qtu
rsvwxy
z
0
1
2
3
6
7
9
8
5
4
17
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
A
Crop factor .....................................................186
B
ND (Neutral Density) fi lter indicator ......171
C
Focus check ............................................ 89, 155
D
IS mode
2
.........................................................170
E
Depth-of-fi eld preview ...........................74, 88
F
Flash (TTL) mode .........................................335
G
Flash compensation ...................................335
H
Conversion lens ............................................170
I
Self-timer indicator ............................163, 184
J
Continuous mode ........................................103
K
Shutter type ...................................................168
L
AF+MF indicator
2
.......................................153
M
Bluetooth ON/OFF
N
White balance .............................................. 126
O
AWB lock ........................................................298
P
Film simulation ............................................ 122
Q
F-Log/HLG recording ..................................187
R
Dynamic range ............................................130
S
D-range priority ...........................................131
T
Movie mode ...........................................60, 182
U
High-speed recording indicator .............. 183
V
Recording time available/
elapsed recording time ..............................60
W
Number of available frames
1
...................382
X
Image size ......................................................118
Y
File format ......................................................185
Z
Image quality................................................119
a
HEIF format ...................................................121
b
Movie compression .....................................185
c
Date and time ..................................47, 49, 271
d
Touch screen mode .............................. 30, 158
e
Temperature warning ......................... 40, 381
f
Control lock
3
.................................................302
g
Sound and fl ash indicator ........................275
h
Virtual horizon .................................................27
i
Boost mode ...................................................304
j
Power supply ....................................................44
k
Histogram .........................................................26
l
Battery level ......................................................46
m
Sensitivity ..........................................................91
n
Exposure compensation ...............................95
o
Aperture ...............................................69, 74, 75
p
Distance indicator
2
........................................88
q
Shutter speed .....................................69, 70, 75
r
TTL lock ..................................................174, 323
s
AE lock ...................................................... 98, 298
t
Metering ............................................................93
u
Shooting mode ...............................................68
v
Focus mode
2
....................................................78
w
Focus indicator
2
..............................................79
x
Manual focus indicator
2
.......................78, 86
y
AF lock ...................................................... 98, 298
z
Time code .......................................................207
0
Microphone input channel
1
Recording level
2
........................................... 204
2
Exposure indicator ...................................75, 95
3
Focus frame ...............................................82, 97
4
Bluetooth host ..............................................240
5
Location data download status ......240,308
6
Digital teleconverter ...................................171
7
Frame.io connection status ......................255
8
Image transfer status ........................240, 261
9
Frame.io upload progress ..........................252
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF/OVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
18
1
Before You Begin
The LCD Monitor
00:00:00:0000:00:00:00
A OIG H P Q W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
f
e
i hjkn lmopqtu
rsvwxy
z
3
4
L MC D R S
9
5
2
7
B
8
N
1
E
0
F
TU V
6
g
J K
19
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
A
Crop factor .....................................................186
B
Bluetooth ON/OFF
C
ND (Neutral Density) fi lter indicator ......171
D
Focus check ............................................ 89, 155
E
Bluetooth host ..............................................240
F
Depth-of-fi eld preview ...........................74, 88
G
Conversion lens ............................................170
H
Digital teleconverter ...................................171
I
Location data download status ......240,308
J
Image transfer status ........................240, 261
K
Frame.io upload progress ..........................252
L
Movie mode ...........................................60, 182
M
High-speed recording indicator .............. 183
N
Focus frame ...............................................82, 97
O
Recording time available/
elapsed recording time ..............................60
P
Date and time ..................................47, 49, 271
Q
Number of available frames
1
...................382
R
Image size ......................................................118
S
File format ......................................................185
T
Image quality................................................119
U
HEIF format ...................................................121
V
Movie compression .....................................185
W
Touch screen mode
3
............................ 30, 158
X
AWB lock ........................................................298
Y
White balance .............................................. 126
Z
Film simulation ............................................ 122
a
F-Log/HLG recording ..................................187
b
Dynamic range ............................................130
c
D-range priority ...........................................131
d
Control lock
4
.................................................302
e
Sound and fl ash indicator ........................275
f
Boost mode ...................................................304
g
Temperature warning ......................... 40, 381
h
Virtual horizon .................................................27
i
Battery level ......................................................46
j
Power supply ....................................................44
k
Sensitivity ..........................................................91
l
Histogram .........................................................26
m
Exposure compensation ...............................95
n
Distance indicator
2
........................................88
o
Aperture ...............................................69, 74, 75
p
Time code .......................................................207
q
Shutter speed .....................................69, 70, 75
r
TTL lock ..................................................174, 323
s
AE lock ...................................................... 98, 298
t
Metering ............................................................93
u
Shooting mode ...............................................68
v
Focus mode
2
....................................................78
w
Focus indicator
2
..............................................79
x
Manual focus indicator
2
.......................78, 86
y
AF lock ...................................................... 98, 298
z
Microphone input channel
0
AF+MF indicator
2
.......................................153
1
Shutter type ...................................................168
2
Continuous mode ........................................103
3
Recording level
2
........................................... 204
4
Exposure indicator ...................................75, 95
5
Self-timer indicator ............................163, 184
6
Frame.io connection status ......................255
7
Flash (TTL) mode .........................................335
8
Flash compensation ...................................335
9
IS mode
2
.........................................................170
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
20
1
Before You Begin
Choosing a Display Mode
Use D SCREEN SET-UP> VIEW MODE SETTING to choose from
the following display modes. You can choose separate display
modes for shooting and playback.
N
You can also assign VIEW MODE SETTING to a function button and
use it to switch between the EVF/OVF and LCD monitor.
SHOOTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
E
E
EYE SENSOR
EYE SENSOR
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfi nder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfi nder off .
VIEWFINDER ONLY
VIEWFINDER ONLY Viewfi nder on, LCD monitor off .
VIEWFINDER
VIEWFINDER
ONLY +
ONLY +
E
E
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on; taking it away turns the viewfi nder off . The LCD
monitor remains off .
E
E
EYE SENSOR + LCD
EYE SENSOR + LCD
IMAGE DISP.
IMAGE DISP.
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder during shooting
turns the viewfi nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
the display of images once you remove your eye from
the viewfi nder after shooting. The options selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor. This setting cannot be selected
while shooting movies.
N
Go to D SCREEN SET-UP> VIEW MODE SETTING> SHOOTING in
the setup menu and press the Q button to choose the view modes
available.
21
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
PLAYBACK
Option
Option
Description
Description
E
E
EYE SENSOR
EYE SENSOR
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfi nder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfi nder off .
VIEWFINDER ONLY
VIEWFINDER ONLY Viewfi nder on, LCD monitor off .
22
1
Before You Begin
Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the view nder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust view nder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.
Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE
DISPLAYS, the indicators in the view nder and LCD monitor au-
tomatically rotate to match camera orientation.
23
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators in the view nder and LCD
monitor.
N
Indicators for the EVF, OVF, and LCD must be selected separately. To
choose the indicators displayed in the EVF and OVF, place your eye to
the view nder and press the DISP/BACK button.
Viewfi nder (OVF)
Standard indicators
Full screen
(no indicators)
12800
24
1
Before You Begin
Viewfi nder (EVF)
Standard indicators
Full screen
(no indicators)
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
12800
1000
LCD Monitor
Standard indicators No indicators
Info display
(still photography only)
25
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Customizing Display Indicators
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:
1
Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.
Select D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.
2
Highlight OVF or EVF/LCD and press MENU/OK.
3
Choose items.
Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
•
FRAMING GUIDELINE
•
FOCUS FRAME
•
FOCUS INDICATOR
•
AF DISTANCE INDICATOR
•
MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
•
HISTOGRAM
•
LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT
•
SHOOTING MODE
•
APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO
•
INFORMATION BACKGROUND
•
Expo. Comp. (Digit)
•
Expo. Comp. (Scale)
•
FOCUS MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLASH
•
CONTINUOUS MODE
•
DUAL IS MODE
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
BOOST MODE
•
FRAMES REMAINING
•
IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY
•
MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
•
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
•
xF CONVERSION LENS
•
COMMUNICATION STATUS
•
MIC LEVEL
•
GUIDANCE MESSAGE
•
NO STORAGE MEDIA WARNING
•
DATE/TIME
•
BATTERY LEVEL
•
FRAMING OUTLINE
4
Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
26
1
Before You Begin
Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is
shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.
Number of pixels
Shadows Highlights
Pixel brightness
•
Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve
throughout the tone range.
•
Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.
•
Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.
To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-
play showing areas of the frame that will be
overexposed at current settings superimposed
on the view through the lens, press the func-
tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned
(P 294, 319).
A
Overexposed areas blink
B
RGB histograms
27
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be cho-
sen using D SCREEN SET-UP> ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on
a tripod or the like.
2D 3D
Pitch Roll
•
OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
•
2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
•
3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.
N
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.
28
1
Before You Begin
Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.
The Menus
Di erent menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
Still Photography
The photo menus are displayed when a
setting other than MOVIE is selected in
the drive-mode menu.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
Movie Recording
The movie menus are displayed when
MOVIE is selected in the drive-mode
menu.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE MODE
FSELF-TIMER
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
HIGH SPEED REC
EXIT
Playback
The playback menus are displayed during
playback.
ERASE
RAW CONVERSION
PLAY BACK MENU
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
IMAGE ROTATE
EXIT
VOICE MEMO SETTING
29
1
Before You Begin
Using the Menus
Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:
1
Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left
to highlight the tab for the current
menu.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
Tab
3
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab contain-
ing the desired item.
4
Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.
N
Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through
menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.
30
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.
Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING.
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
EVF/OVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
TOUCH FUNCTION
DOUBLE TAP SETTING
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS
ON
OFF
EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-
tures are being framed in the electronic view nder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> EVF/
OVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the
monitor employed for touch controls.
N
•
When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING>
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used
for focus.
•
You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferential-
ly focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING> SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
31
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selected
by tapping the touch screen mode indica-
tor in the display. Touch controls can be
used for the following operations:
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
TOUCH
TOUCH
SHOOTING
SHOOTING
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your fi nger
on the display.
AF
AF
AFOFF
AFOFF
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AFOFF icon.
•
In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
O
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 159).
N
•
To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-
lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
•
Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during mov-
ie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 202)”.
32
1
Before You Begin
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING>
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or
tapping the movie-optimized mode but-
ton in the shooting display optimizes the
command dials and touch controls for
movie recording. This can be used to pre-
vent camera sounds being recorded with
movie footage.
Movie-optimized
mode button
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
•
EXPOSURE COMPENSATION
•
F ISO
•
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
•
WIND FILTER
•
HEADPHONES VOLUME
•
F FILM SIMULATION
•
F WHITE BALANCE
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
N
•
Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring and
the shutter-speed, sensitivity, and exposure compensation dials.
•
When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized
mode button can be used to change shooting settings or disable
movie-optimized control.
•
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT can be set only when an ex-
ternal mic is connected.
33
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the follow-
ing ick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 324):
•
Flick up: T-Fn1
•
Flick left: T-Fn2
•
Flick right: T-Fn3
•
Flick down: T-Fn4
N
•
In some cases, touch-function ick ges-
tures display a menu; tap to select the
desired option.
-20
0
-6
-12
-40
-50
dB
LR
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
SET CANCEL
•
Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION.
34
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:
•
Swipe: Swipe a nger across the display to
view other images.
•
Pinch-out: Place two ngers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.
•
Pinch-in: Place two ngers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.
N
Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no
further.
•
Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in
on the focus point.
•
Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.
35
First Steps
36
2
First Steps
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap clips to the camera and then attach the
strap.
1
Attach a protective cover.
Place a protective cover over the eye-
let as shown, with the black side of
the cover toward the camera.
Protective cover
2
Open a strap clip.
Use the clip attaching tool (A) to
open a strap clip (B).
(B)
(A)
3
Slide the clip onto the tool.
Slide the clip onto the tool so that it
hooks over the projection.
37
2
First Steps
Attaching the Strap
4
Place the strap clip on an eyelet.
Hook the strap eyelet in the clip
opening. Remove the tool, using the
other hand to keep the clip in place.
N
Keep the tool in a safe place, as you will
need it to open the strap clips when
removing the strap.
5
Pass the clip through the eyelet.
Rotate the clip fully through the eye-
let until it clicks closed.
6
Fasten the strap.
Insert the strap through a protective
cover and strap clip and fasten the
buckle as shown.
O
To avoid dropping the camera, be sure
the strap is correctly secured.
Strap clip
Buckle
Repeat the above steps for the second eyelet.
38
2
First Steps
Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card
Insert the battery and memory card as described below.
1
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Slide the battery-chamber latch as
shown and open the battery-cham-
ber cover.
O
•
Do not remove the battery when the
camera is on. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage image les
or memory cards.
•
Do not use excessive force when
handling the battery-chamber cover.
2
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery as shown.
O
•
Insert the battery in the orientation
shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down or
backwards. The battery will slide in
easily in the correct orientation.
•
Con rm that the battery is securely
latched.
39
2
First Steps
Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card
3
Insert the memory card.
Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot.
O
Be sure card is in the correct orienta-
tion; do not insert at an angle or use
force.
4
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Close and latch the cover.
O
If the cover does not close, check that
the battery is in the correct orienta-
tion. Do not attempt to force the cover
shut.
O
Do not open the battery-chamber cover when the camera is on. Failure
to observe this precaution could damage image les or memory cards.
40
2
First Steps
Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera o and open the battery-cham-
ber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of the
camera as shown.
O
The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-
ments. Observe caution when removing the battery.
Removing Memory Cards
To remove the memory card, press it in and re-
lease it slowly. The card can then be removed
by hand.
O
•
Press the center of the card.
•
Suddenly removing your nger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your nger slowly.
•
If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the
touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.
41
2
First Steps
Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card
Compatible Memory Cards
•
The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards.
•
The camera supports UHS-I memory cards.
•
To record movies, use cards with a UHS speed class of 3 or better
or a video speed class of V30 or better.
•
A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fuji lm
website. For details, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/
.
O
•
Do not turn the camera o or remove the memory card while the memo-
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from
the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
•
Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a mem-
ory card, slide the write-protect switch to
the unlocked position.
•
Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of
children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
•
miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-
era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
•
Do not a x labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
•
Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
•
Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored when a picture is taken for the rst time. Do not
rename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device to
edit, delete, or rename image les. Always use the camera to delete
pictures; before editing or renaming les, copy them to a computer
and edit or rename the copies, not the originals. Renaming the les
on the camera can cause problems during playback.
42
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery
before use.
O
•
An NP-W126S rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
•
Turn the camera o for charging.
•
The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available
with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating sys-
tem and USB interface.
Leave the computer on during charging.
O
•
The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
•
Connect the supplied USB cable.
•
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
•
Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
•
Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-
puter, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
•
The battery takes about 5 hours to charge with a charging input of
5 V/500 mA.
43
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
•
To charge the battery from a household AC power outlet, use a
BC-W126S battery charger (available separately).
Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Battery status
Battery status
On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Charging error
44
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
O
•
Do not use the supplied USB cable with other devices, as this could
cause malfunction.
•
Do not a x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from
the camera.
•
Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
•
Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
•
Use only genuine Fuji lm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-
uct malfunction.
•
Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
•
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the
battery one or two days before use.
•
If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
•
Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
•
Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
•
Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.
N
•
If the camera is turned on during charging,
charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline (P 268).
•
The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.
45
2
First Steps
Turning the Camera On and O
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and o .
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera o .
O
Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or view nder can a ect pic-
tures or the view through the view nder. Keep the lens and view nder
clean.
N
•
Pressing the PLAY button during shooting starts playback.
•
Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
•
The camera will turn o automatically if no operations are performed
for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT>
AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned o
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.
46
2
First Steps
Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the
display.
Battery level is shown as follows:
Indicator
Indicator
Description
Description
e
Battery partially discharged.
f
Battery about 80% full.
g
Battery about 60% full.
h
Battery about 40% full.
i
Battery about 20% full.
i
(red)
Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
j
(blinks red)
Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery.
47
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the rst time, you can
choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the
steps below when turning the camera on for the rst time.
1
Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.
3
Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on
or o using the focus stick (focus le-
ver), then highlight SET and press
MENU/OK.
OFF
GMT ±0:00
SET
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
AREA SETTING
BERLIN/PARIS
AREA SETTING
NO
N
To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.
48
2
First Steps
4
Set the clock.
Press MENU/OK to proceed to the next
step.
..
GMT +1:00
2024 31 1212 00
NO
SET
DATE/TIME
BERLIN/PARIS
MM/DD/YY
DD.MM.YY
YY.MM.DD
5
View information on the smartphone app.
•
The camera will display a QR code
you can scan with your smartphone
to open a website where you can
download the smartphone app.
•
Press MENU/OK to proceed to the
next step.
SET
APPLICATION
IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED
TO THE SMARTPHONE.
SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.
N
Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely (P 240).
6
Format the memory card (P 270).
O
Format memory cards before rst use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.
N
If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will
be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.
Skipping the Current Step
If you skip a step, a con rmation dialog will be displayed; select NO to avoid
repeating any steps you skipped the next time the camera is turned on.
49
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
Choosing a Di erent Language
To change the language:
1
Display language options.
Select D USER SETTING> Qa.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:
1
Display DATE/TIME options.
Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME.
2
Set the clock.
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
50
MEMO
51
Basic Photography and
Playback
52
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 68–76 for information on S, A,
and M modes.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and se-
lect STILL IMAGE in the drive-mode
menu.
2
Adjust settings for program AE.
Setting
Setting
P
P
A
Shutter speed A (auto) 68
B
Sensitivity A (auto) 91
C
Aperture A (auto) 68
D
Focus mode S (single AF) 78
53
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
3
Check the shooting mode.
Con rm that P appears in the display.
4
Ready the camera.
•
Hold the camera steady with both
hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or un-
steady hands can blur your shots.
•
To prevent pictures that are out of
focus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your ngers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator.
5
Frame the picture.
N
The bright frame in the OVF shows the area that will appear in the
nal photograph.
54
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
6
Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
Focus indicator
Focus frame
•
If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
•
If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s
will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.
N
•
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to
assist the focus operation.
•
Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is
kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
•
The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro
and standard focus ranges for the lens.
7
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.
55
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the view nder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press the PLAY button.
100-0001
Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo-
cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press
the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.
N
Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)
icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback
zoom may not be available.
56
3
Basic Photography and Playback
HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a
third-party HDMI cable.
1
Turn the camera o .
2
Connect the cable as shown below.
Insert into
HDMI connector
Insert into HDMI Micro
connector (Type D)
3
Con gure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-
umentation supplied with the device.
4
Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will
be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns o
in playback mode (P 57).
O
•
Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
•
The USB cable cannot be used while an HDMI cable is connected.
•
Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long.
57
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Viewing Pictures
Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an exter-
nal recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera PLAY button. The camera
monitor turns o and pictures and movies are output to the
HDMI device. Note that the camera volume controls have no ef-
fect on sounds played on the TV; use the television volume con-
trols to adjust the volume.
N
•
Some televisions may brie y display a black screen when movie play-
back begins.
•
An adapter cable (sold separately; P 387) is required when using
headphones.
58
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Deleting Pictures
Use the DRIVE/DELETE button to delete pictures.
O
Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
1
With a picture displayed full frame, press the DRIVE/DELETE but-
ton and select FRAME.
FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES
ERASE
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a con rmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.
N
•
Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 224).
•
Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK
MENU> ERASE option (P 220).
59
Movie Recording and
Playback
60
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
This section describes how to lm movies in auto mode.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and se-
lect MOVIE in the drive-mode menu.
2
Adjust settings for program AE.
Setting
Setting
P
P
A
Shutter speed A (auto) 68
B
Sensitivity A (auto) 91
C
Aperture A (auto) 68
D
Focus mode C (Continuous AF) 78
61
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
Recording will start.
•
A recording indicator (V) is dis-
played while recording is in prog-
ress.
•
The borders of the display turn
red during movie recording, green
during high-speed recording.
Recording time
Time remaining
•
The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.
4
Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends
automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full.
O
•
Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
•
Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.
•
Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
62
4
Movie Recording and Playback
N
•
To maximize recording time:
-
keep the camera out of direct sunlight as much as possible, and
-
turn the camera o any time it is not in use.
•
The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE
SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and
whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2EV.
•
To prevent the borders of the display changing color during mov-
ie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING> F REC FRAME
INDICATOR.
•
While recording is in progress, you can:
-
Adjust sensitivity
-
Refocus using any of the following methods:
•
Press the shutter button halfway
•
Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned
•
Use touch screen controls
-
Display a histogram or arti cial horizon by pressing the button to
which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been as-
signed
•
Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
•
To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING> FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and
rear command dial (P 82).
63
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns o to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external micro-
phones that connect using jacks 2.5 mm in
diameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.
64
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
Adjusting Movie Settings
Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using
the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 28).
•
Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quickly
adjust settings when recording movies via a button to which
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE has been assigned (P 177).
•
The movie menus contain options for use when recording mov-
ies via the shutter button with MOVIE selected in the drive-
mode menu (P 181).
•
Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted us-
ing MOVIE MODE.
•
Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the le
type, bit rate, and destination.
•
Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector. Regard-
less of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch
to C when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON
is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING> g FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, howev-
er, that choosing M when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection.
O
Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus
also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of menus
automatically apply in the other.
Depth of Field
To soften backgrounds, set aperture as wide as possible. Aperture can be
adjusted manually at settings other than A.
65
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
Any movie selected after the PLAY button
is pressed to begin playback will be indi-
cated by a W icon. Press the focus stick
(focus lever) down to start movie play-
back.
AUDIO SET.PLAY
The following operations can be per-
formed while a movie is displayed:
Focus stick
Focus stick
(focus lever)
(focus lever)
Full-frame playback
Full-frame playback
Playback in
Playback in
progress (
progress (
x
x
)
)
Playback
Playback
paused (
paused (
y
y
)
)
Up
View photo
information
End playback
Down Start playback Pause playback Start/resume playback
Left/right
View other pictures
Adjust speed
Single frame rewind/
advance
Progress is shown in the display during
playback.
STOP PAUSE
66
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Viewing Movies
O
Do not cover the speaker during playback.
N
•
Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press
the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press
MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-
ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME.
•
Headphones and other audio output devices can be connected us-
ing third-party USB analog output audio adapters.
•
To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the
camera monitor, press the PLAY button (P 56).
Playback Speed
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to
adjust playback speed during playback. Speed
is shown by the number of arrows (M or N).
29m59s
Arrows
67
Taking Photographs
68
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be
selected with program shift.
Setting
Setting
A
Shutter speed A (auto)
B
Aperture A (auto)
Con rm that P appears in the display.
O
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
69
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Program Shift
If desired, you can rotate the rear command dial
to select other combinations of shutter speed
and aperture without altering exposure (pro-
gram shift).
Aperture
Shutter speed
O
Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:
•
With ash units that support TTL auto
•
When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
In movie mode
N
To cancel program shift, turn the camera o .
70
5
Taking Photographs
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.
Setting
Setting
A
Shutter speed User-selected
B
Aperture A (auto)
Con rm that S appears in the display.
O
•
If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-
ture display will show “– – –”.
N
•
Shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 1⁄3EV by rotating
the rear command dial.
•
Shutter speed can be adjusted while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
•
At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.
•
To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
•
The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long
time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.
71
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Time (T)
Choose a shutter speed of T (time) for long time-exposures.
Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving
during the exposure.
1
Set shutter speed to T.
2
Rotate the rear command dial to
choose a shutter speed.
3
Press the shutter button all the way down to take a picture
at the selected shutter speed. At speeds of 1 s or slower, a
count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in
progress.
N
To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this
may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
72
5
Taking Photographs
Bulb (B)
Choose a shutter speed of B (bulb) for long time-exposures in
which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod
is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the ex-
posure.
1
Set shutter speed to B.
2
Press the shutter button all the way down. The shutter will
remain open for up to 60 minutes while the shutter button
is pressed; the display shows the time elapsed since the ex-
posure started.
N
•
Selecting an aperture of A xes shutter speed at 30 s.
•
To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
73
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-ex-
posures. When using an optional RR-100 re-
mote release or an electronic release from
third-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s
microphone/remote release connector.
N
A con rmation dialog will be displayed
when a remote release is connected; press
MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/
REMOTE RELEASE.
SKIP
CHECK MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
SETTING
SET
74
5
Taking Photographs
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.
Setting
Setting
A
Shutter speed A (auto)
B
Aperture User-selected
Con rm that A appears in the display.
O
•
If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.
N
Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button dis-
plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the
selected setting, allowing depth of eld to be
previewed in the display.
75
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed
(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-
pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-
ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.
Setting
Setting
A
Shutter speed User-selected
B
Aperture User-selected
Con rm that M appears in the display.
N
Shutter speed can be adjusted in increments of 1⁄3EV by rotating the
rear command dial.
76
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP> PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.
N
Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the ash
or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the pic-
ture is taken.
78
5
Taking Photographs
Focus Mode
Use the focus mode selector to choose
how the camera focuses.
Choose from the following options:
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
S
(AF-S)
Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.
C
(AF-C)
Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to refl ect changes in the
distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Use for subjects that are in motion.
M
(manual)
Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual
control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus (P 86).
N
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-
justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button
is not pressed.
79
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.
Focus indicator
Focus indicator
Focus indicator
Focus status
Focus status
( ) Camera focusing.
z
(lights green)
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S).
(z)
(lights green)
Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjust-
ed for changes in distance to subject.
A
(blinks white)
Camera unable to focus.
j
Manual focus (focus mode M).
80
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.
1
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2
Select G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE.
3
Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
Option
Option
Description
Description
Sample image
Sample image
r
SINGLE POINT
Camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point. Use for pin-
point focus on selected subject.
y
ZONE
Camera focuses on subject in se-
lected focus zone. Focus zones in-
clude multiple focus points, mak-
ing it easier to focus on subjects in
motion.
z
WIDE
Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.
j
ALL
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-
play (P 82, 84) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE ALL SETTING.
81
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Focus Mode C (AF-C)
Focus Mode C (AF-C)
Option
Option
Description
Description
Sample image
Sample image
r
SINGLE POINT
Focus tracks subject at selected fo-
cus point. Use for subjects moving
toward or away from camera.
y
ZONE
Camera tracks focus in selected fo-
cus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.
z
TRACKING
Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.
j
ALL
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-
play (P 82, 84) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE ALL SETTING.
82
5
Taking Photographs
Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.
Viewing the Focus-Point Display
1
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2
Select G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS AREA to view the fo-
cus-point display.
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to
choose a focus area.
N
The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 30).
83
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear command
dial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option se-
lected for AF mode.
AF mode
AF mode
Focus stick
Focus stick
Rear command dial
Rear command dial
Tilt
Tilt
Press
Press
Rotate
Rotate
Press
Press
r
r
Select focus
point
Select center
focus point
Choose from 6
frame sizes
Restore original
size
y
y
z
z
—
N
•
Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING
is selected in focus mode S.
•
You can also press the DISP/BACK button to return the focus area to the
center.
84
5
Taking Photographs
The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.
N
•
Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the
large squares.
•
The dimensions of ZONE CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, and ZONE
CUSTOM 3 can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING> ZONE
CUSTOM SETTING.
AF mode
AF mode
r
r
SINGLE POINT
SINGLE POINT
y
y
ZONE
ZONE
z
z
WIDE/TRACKING
WIDE/TRACKING
Number of points avail-
able can be selected using
G
AF/MF SETTING>
NUMBER OF FOCUS
POINTS.
Choose from zones with
7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus
points or from ZONE
CUSTOM 1, ZONE
CUSTOM 2, and ZONE
CUSTOM 3.
Position focus frame over
subject you want to track
using continuous AF.
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be
unable to focus on the subjects listed below.
•
Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
•
Subjects photographed through a window or other re ective object.
•
Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than re ect light, such as
hair or fur.
•
Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or ame.
•
Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
•
Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).
85
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the rear command
dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
another focus area. Press the center of the rear
command dial again to cancel zoom.
Normal display Focus zoom
N
•
In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command
dial.
•
The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in
e ect.
•
In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
•
Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when
G AF/MF
SETTING>
PRE-AF is on.
•
Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to
change the function performed by the center of the rear command
dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls
(P 319).
86
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.
1
Slide the focus mode selector to M.
j will appear in the display.
2
Focus manually using the lens focus
ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.
3
Take pictures.
N
Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS RING to reverse the direc-
tion of rotation of the focus ring.
87
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Quick Focus
•
To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press
the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of
the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
•
In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-
sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING> xF INSTANT AF SETTING.
88
5
Taking Photographs
Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-
cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of eld, or in other words the distance in
front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance
(white line)
Depth of eld
N
•
If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-
of- eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to
display standard indicators.
•
Use the G AF/MF SETTING> xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT
BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of eld for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to
help you assess depth of eld for pictures that will be viewed at high
resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.
89
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK, the
camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area
when the focus ring is rotated.
Press the center of the rear com-
mand dial to exit zoom.
N
•
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
•
Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-
not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL
MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist.
MF Assist
Use
G
AF/MF SETTING> MF ASSIST (P 154) in the photo
menus or
G
AF/MF SETTING> F MF ASSIST (P 200) in the
movie menus to choose a focus check option.
N
The focus check options for movies di er from those for still photog-
raphy.
•
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image
in the center of the frame. Frame the
subject in the split-image area and ro-
tate the focus ring until the four parts
of the split image are correctly aligned.
•
DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that
emphasizes blur is displayed when the
subject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when the
subject is in focus.
90
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
•
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-
trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.
•
FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below
the focus point indicating whether fo-
cus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it is
behind the subject. Adjust focus so the
needle is pointing straight up.
N
The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for
D
BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> FOCUS RING.
•
FOCUS MAP: Square indicators are dis-
played in focus frames to indicate points
that are in focus and not in focus by color.
A green indicator is displayed on a point
in focus on the subject and a point the
same distance as the subject. A yellow
indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus position, and
a blue indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus position.
N
•
You can change the indicator colors to monochrome using G AF/
MF SETTING> F MF ASSIST in the movie menus. With this setting,
a white indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus posi-
tion, and a black indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus
position.
•
Indicators may not be displayed for subjects that are di cult to cap-
ture with auto focus (P 84).
91
5
Taking Photographs
Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Sensitivity can be set by lifting and rotat-
ing the sensitivity dial.
Sensitivity
Option
Option
Description
Description
A (auto)
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting
conditions according to option chosen for A SHOOTING
SETTING>ISO AUTO SETTING. Choose from AUTO1,
AUTO2, and AUTO3.
C (command)
Rotate the front command dial to choose from values of from
64 to 51200. This range includes “extended” values of 64 to 100,
25600, and 51200. Note that “extended” values may reduce
dynamic range or increase mottling.
125–12800 Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display.
Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,
however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.
92
5
Taking Photographs
Sensitivity
Auto Sensitivity (A)
Use A SHOOTING SETTING> ISO AUTO SETTING to choose
the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shut-
ter speed for the A position on the sensitivity dial. Settings for
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 can be stored separately; the de-
faults are shown below.
Item
Item
Options
Options
Default
Default
AUTO1
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO2
AUTO3
AUTO3
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY 125–12800 125
MAX. SENSITIVITY 400–12800 800 3200 12800
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ½ –30SEC, AUTO AUTO
The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-
fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the
default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.
N
•
If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that
selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to
the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
•
The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER
SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
•
If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will choose
the minimum shutter speed automatically. The minimum shutter
speed is not a ected by the option selected for image stabilization.
93
5
Taking Photographs
Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING> PHOTOMETRY o ers a choice of the
following metering options:
O
The selected option will only take e ect if OFF is selected for g FACE/
EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
o
MULTI
MULTI
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an
analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution.
Recommended in most situations.
p
CENTER-
CENTER-
WEIGHTED
WEIGHTED
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
v
SPOT
SPOT
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and
in other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
w
AVERAGE
AVERAGE
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same
lighting, and is particularly eff ective for landscapes and
portraits of subjects dressed in black or white.
N
To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING> INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 155).
94
5
Taking Photographs
The Digital Teleconverter
Use the digital teleconverter to further magnify the image
with di erent focal lengths.
1
Assign DIGITAL TELE-CONV. to the control ring (P 12).
2
Choose the zoom angle using the
control ring.
Standard (35 mm
*
) 50 mm
*
70 mm
*
* 35 mm format equivalent
3
Take pictures at the selected zoom angle.
O
•
Image size may be changed when the digital teleconverter is used.
•
RAW pictures cannot be magni ed. To save magni ed copies, ap-
ply digital development to the images after selecting ON for RAW
CONVERSION> DIGITAL TELE-CONV. in the playback menu.
•
The digital teleconverter may be unavailable in some modes (P 171).
N
•
Digital teleconverter settings can also be accessed via
A SHOOTING
SETTING>
DIGITAL TELE-CONV..
•
The zoom angles available when a conversion lens is attached are 72
and 100 mm for telephoto conversion lenses (teleconverters) and 41
and 58 mm for wide-angle conversion lenses.
95
5
Taking Photographs
Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Rotate the exposure compensation dial.
O
•
The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
•
Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,
although the display may not accurately re ect its e ects if:
-
the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,
-
W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or
-
STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the view nder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the
display may not accurately re ect the e ects of exposure compensa-
tion during F-Log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is select-
ed for F
DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.
96
5
Taking Photographs
Exposure Compensation
C (Custom)
When the exposure compensation dial is
rotated to C, exposure compensation can
be adjusted by rotating the front com-
mand dial.
N
•
The front command dial can be used to set exposure compensation
to values between −5 and +5EV.
•
The role played by the front command dial can be selected by press-
ing the center of the dial.
97
5
Taking Photographs
Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
1
Position the subject in the focus
frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AF/AE lock).
2
Press the button all the way down.
N
Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available
when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.
98
5
Taking Photographs
Focus/Exposure Lock
Other Controls
Pressing the AEL/AFL button locks both fo-
cus and exposure.
•
While the assigned control is pressed,
pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
•
If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be
ended by pressing the control a second
time.
AEL/AFL button
(AE/AF lock)
N
•
The AEL/AFL button can be assigned other roles using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure and focus lock
can also be assigned to other function buttons (P 319).
•
Exposure and focus lock can be performed separately by assigning
them to di erent function buttons.
99
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and se-
lect the desired bracketing option in
the drive-mode menu.
2
Take photographs.
W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take
a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with
sensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode dis-
play. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot
and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white
balanced setting, one with ne-tuning increased by the selected
amount, and another with ne-tuning decreased by the selected
amount.
100
5
Taking Photographs
s Bracketing
O AE BKT
Use A SHOOTING SETTING> AE BKT SETTING to choose the
bracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the speci ed number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or un-
der-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.
N
Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the
limits of the exposure metering system.
X FILM SIMULATION BKT
Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and
processes it to create copies with di erent lm simulation settings,
chosen using
A
SHOOTING SETTING> FILM SIMULATION BKT.
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
shots with di erent dynamic ranges: 100% for the rst, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.
N
While dynamic range bracketing is in e ect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO500; the sensitivity previously in e ect is restored
when bracketing ends.
101
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
Z FOCUS BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a se-
ries of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTING
SETTING> FOCUS BKT SETTING item o ers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.
N
•
Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUAL
MANUAL
In MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAMES Choose the number of shots.
STEP Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
INTERVAL Choose the interval between shots.
Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP
is shown in the illustration.
12345
Starting focus position
•
Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infi nity.
•
Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger
changes.
•
Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reach-
es infi nity.
Frames
Step
102
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
AUTO
AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP auto-
matically.
1
Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, high-
light FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
2
Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.
The view through the lens will be displayed.
3
Focus on the nearest end of the sub-
ject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.
SETSET POINT B
SET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
FOCUS BKT SETTING
N
The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest
end of the subject rst.
4
Focus on the farthest end of the sub-
ject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) and
focus range (A to B) appear on the
focus distance indicator.
SETSET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
SET POINT B
FOCUS BKT SETTING
N
Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
and select A again.
5
Take photographs.
The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in the
display.
NO
103
5
Taking Photographs
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and se-
lect J CH HIGH SPEED BURST or
O CL LOW SPEED BURST in the drive-
mode menu.
2
Choose the frame advance rate and press the shutter button
to start shooting.
Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.
O
•
If le numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the re-
maining pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
•
Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record
all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the
space available on the memory card is insu cient.
•
Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
•
Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the ash
may not re.
•
Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
•
The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING> SHUTTER TYPE.
104
5
Taking Photographs
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Focus and Exposure
•
Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot.
•
To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> SHUTTER AE.
N
Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-
pensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.
105
5
Taking Photographs
HDR
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes
three shots, varying exposure each time, and combines
them into a single picture. The resulting photograph pre-
serves details in highlights and shadows.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and se-
lect HDR in the drive-mode menu.
2
Choose the amount the brightnesses of the exposures vary.
Option
Option
Description
Description
HDR AUTO
Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%
to 800%.
HDR200 Dynamic range is set to 200%.
HDR400 Dynamic range is set to 400%.
HDR800 Dynamic range is set to 800%.
HDR800+
Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dy-
namic range.
3
Take photographs.
The camera will create a combined image.
106
5
Taking Photographs
HDR
O
•
Keep the camera steady.
•
The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or the
composition or lighting changes during shooting.
•
The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution
will drop slightly.
•
Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a val-
ue according to the scene.
•
“Extended” sensitivity values are not supported.
•
Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures
may not be taken at the selected shutter speed.
•
The ash does not re.
N
HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback.
107
5
Taking Photographs
Panoramas
Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and se-
lect Adv.> PANORAMA in the drive-
mode menu.
2
To select the size of the angle through which you will pan the
camera while shooting, press the focus stick (focus lever) left.
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK.
3
Press the focus stick right to view a choice of pan directions.
Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK.
4
Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording.
There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during
recording.
5
Pan the camera in the direction
shown by the arrow. Shooting ends
automatically when the camera is
panned to the end of the guides and
the panorama is complete.
Sweep camera along yellow
line in direction of
ANGLE DIRECTION
108
5
Taking Photographs
For Best Results
•
Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed
•
Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to
pan only in the direction shown by the guides
•
Try panning at a di erent speed if the desired results are not achieved
•
Prop your elbows against your sides
•
Use a tripod
O
•
If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama
is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded.
•
The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends
before the panorama is complete.
•
Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may in
some cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly.
•
Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit.
•
Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or
too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown
cancels shooting.
•
The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle than
selected.
•
The desired results may not be achieved with:
-
Moving subjects
-
Subjects close to the camera
-
Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a eld of grass
-
Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls
-
Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness
•
If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AE, ex-
posure for the entire panorama is determined by the rst frame.
109
5
Taking Photographs
Panoramas
Viewing Panoramas
With the panorama displayed full frame, press the focus stick (focus lever)
down to start panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically,
horizontal panoramas horizontally.
PLAY
STOP PAUSE
•
In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom pan-
oramas in or out.
•
Panorama playback is controlled using the focus stick.
Focus stick
Focus stick
(focus lever)
(focus lever)
Full-frame
Full-frame
playback
playback
Panorama
Panorama
playback
playback
Panorama
Panorama
playback paused
playback paused
Up — End playback
Down Start playback Pause playback Resume playback
Left/right
View other pictures
Choose pan
direction
Scroll panorama
manually
110
5
Taking Photographs
Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and
select MULTIPLE EXPOSURE in the
drive-mode menu.
2
Choose a blend mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ADDITIVE
The camera adds the exposures together. You may need
to lower exposure compensation depending on the
number of shots.
AVERAGE
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the
fi nal picture. The background in series shot without
changing the composition will be optimally exposed.
BRIGHT
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.
DARK
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.
3
Take the rst shot.
111
5
Taking Photographs
Multiple Exposures
4
Press MENU/OK. The rst shot will be
shown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will be
prompted to take the second shot.
EXITRETRY
NEXT
N
•
To return to the previous step and retake the rst shot, press the
focus stick (focus lever) left.
•
To save the rst shot and exit without creating a multiple expo-
sure, press DISP/BACK.
5
Take the second shot, using the rst
frame as a guide.
EXIT
6
Press MENU/OK.
The combined exposures will be dis-
played as a guide to composing the
next shot.
EXITRETRY
N
•
To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
•
To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.
7
Make additional exposures.
Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.
8
Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.
The camera will create the combined image and multiple ex-
posure shooting will end.
112
5
Taking Photographs
Advanced Filters
Take photos with lter e ects.
1
Press the DRIVE/DELETE button and se-
lect Adv.> ADVANCED FILTER in the
drive-mode menu.
2
Choose a lter.
3
Take photographs.
113
5
Taking Photographs
Advanced Filters
Advanced Filter Options
Choose from the following lters:
Filter
Filter
Description
Description
G TOY CAMERA
Choose for a retro toy camera eff ect.
H MINIATURE
The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for a
diorama eff ect.
I POP COLOR
Create high-contrast images with saturated colors.
J HIGH-KEY
Create bright, low-contrast images.
Z LOW-KEY
Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of em-
phasized highlights.
K DYNAMIC TONE
Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy eff ect.
X SOFT FOCUS
Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the
whole image.
u PARTIAL COLOR (RED)
Areas of the image that are the selected color are
recorded in that color. All other areas of the image
are recorded in black-and-white.
v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE)
w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW)
x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN)
y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE)
z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE)
N
Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in some
cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue.
114
5
Taking Photographs
Flash Photography
Use the built-in ash for additional lighting when shooting
at night or indoors under low light.
1
Select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
in the F FLASH SETTING menu. The
camera will display options for the
built-in ash.
FLASH SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
Built-In Flash
EXIT
N
This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 310).
2
Highlight items using the focus stick
(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-
mand dial to change the highlighted
setting (P 115).
ADJUST
END
Built-In Flash
M
ODE
3
Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into e ect.
O
•
Depending on the distance to the subject, the lens may cast shadows
in photos taken with the ash.
•
The ash will not re at some settings, for example in panorama
mode or when the electronic shutter is used.
•
Choose shutter speeds slower than ½ 000 s when using the ash in
exposure mode S (shutter-priority AE) or manual (M).
N
•
In TTL mode, the ash may re several times with each shot. Do not
move the camera until shooting is complete.
•
The ash will not re if OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH in the
D USER SETTING menu.
•
Optional lens hoods are not recommended for use with the built-in
ash as they may cast shadows that cause vignetting.
115
5
Taking Photographs
Flash Photography
Flash Settings
The following settings are available with the built-in ash.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
Built-In Flash
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
Choose from the following options:
•
TTL: TTL mode. Adjust fl ash compensation (
B
) and choose
a fl ash mode (
C
).
•
M: The fl ash fi res at the selected output (
B
) regardless of
subject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressed
in fractions of full power, from ⁄ to ⁄. The desired results
may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits
of the fl ash control system; take a test shot and check the
results.
•
C (primary ash): Choose if the fl ash is being used as a pri-
mary fl ash controlling secondly fl ash units, for example as
part of a studio fl ash system.
•
D (OFF): The fl ash does not fi re.
B
Flash compensation/
output
Adjust fl ash level. The options available vary with the fl ash
control mode (
A
).
116
5
Taking Photographs
Flash Photography
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
C
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possible;
fl ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
D
Sync
Choose whether the fl ash is timed to fi re immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASH
SETTING> RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the ash is re ected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The ash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½ 000s or slow-
er.
Optional Flash Units from Fuji lm
The camera can be used with optional Fuji lm shoe-mounted ash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party ash units that apply over 300V to the camera hot
shoe.
117
The Shooting Menus
118
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
O 3 : 2
7728 × 5152
O 16 : 9
7728 × 4344
O 1 : 1
5152 × 5152
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
O 4 : 3
6864 × 5152
O 5 : 4
6432 × 5152
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 3 : 2
5472 × 3648
P 16 : 9
5472 × 3080
P 1 : 1
3648 × 3648
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 4 : 3
4864 × 3648
P 5 : 4
4560 × 3648
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
Q 3 : 2
3888 × 2592
Q 16 : 9
3888 × 2184
Q 1 : 1
2592 × 2592
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
Q 4 : 3
3456 × 2592
Q 5 : 4
3264 × 2592
119
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE
and when 1.29X CROP is selected in burst mode:
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 3 : 2
6000 × 4000
P 16 : 9
6000 × 3376
P 1 : 1
4000 × 4000
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 4 : 3
5328 × 4000
P 5 : 4
4992 × 4000
N
IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned o or another
shooting mode is selected.
IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a le format and compression ratio.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FINE
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
NORMAL
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
images that can be stored.
FINE + RAW
Record both RAW and fi ne-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW
Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW
Record RAW images only.
The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or o for a single shot, assign RAW to a
function button (P 319). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option currently selected for
Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY
Option selected by pressing function
Option selected by pressing function
button to which
button to which
RAW
RAW
is assigned
is assigned
FINE FINE + RAW
NORMAL NORMAL + RAW
FINE + RAW FINE
NORMAL + RAW NORMAL
RAW FINE
120
6
The Shooting Menus
RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
Option
Option
Description
Description
UNCOMPRESSED RAW images are not compressed.
LOSSLESS COMPRESSED
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algo-
rithm that reduces fi le size with no loss of image data.
The images can be viewed in FUJIFILM RAW Converter
1
,
Capture One
1
, RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by
SILKYPIX
2
, FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO, or other software that
supports “lossless” RAW compression. Quality is the same
as UNCOMPRESSED, but the resulting fi les are any-
where from about 30 to 90 percent of their uncompressed
size.
COMPRESSED
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting fi les are anywhere from about 25 to 35 per-
cent of their uncompressed size.
1 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-powered-
by-silkypix/
121
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
Option
Option
Description
Description
JPEG
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG for-
mat.
HEIF
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent com-
pression but limited options for viewing and sharing.
O
•
JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during multiple-ex-
posure photography.
•
Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
•
HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as les with the exten-
sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the ex-
tension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.
122
6
The Shooting Menus
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the e ects of di erent kinds of lm, including black-
and-white (with or without color lters). Choose a palette ac-
cording to your subject and creative intent.
Option
Option
Description
Description
c PROVIA/STANDARD
Ideal for a wide range of subjects.
d Velvia/VIVID
Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.
e ASTIA/SOFT
Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.
i CLASSIC CHROME
Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
c
REALA ACE
Faithful color reproduction with hard tonality suitable for
various scenes.
g PRO Neg. Hi
Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.
h PRO Neg. Std
Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.
g
CLASSIC Neg.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
n
NOSTALGIC Neg.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
X ETERNA/CINEMA
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for fi lm look
movie.
N ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASS
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suit-
able for still and movie.
123
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Option
Option
Description
Description
a ACROS
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) fi lters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
•
d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and
darkens skies.
•
c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
•
b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
b MONOCHROME
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red
(R), and green (G) fi lters, which deepen shades of gray cor-
responding to hues complementary to the selected color.
•
e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
•
d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and dark-
ens skies considerably.
•
f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
f SEPIA
Shoots in sepia tone.
N
•
Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
•
Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 310).
•
For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/film-simulation/
124
6
The Shooting Menus
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or
cool color cast) to the a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME monochrome lm
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
SET
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a lm grain e ect.
ROUGHNESS
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for rougher grains.
WEAK Choose for smoother grains.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
SIZE
Option
Option
Description
Description
LARGE Choose for coarser grains.
SMALL Choose for fi ner grains.
125
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
126
6
The Shooting Menus
WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.
Option
Option
Description
Description
WA WHITE
PRIORITY
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically.
AA AMBIENCE
PRIORITY
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
k CUSTOM 1
Measure a value for white balance.
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLOR
TEMPERATURE
Choose a color temperature.
i DAYLIGHT
For subjects in direct sunlight.
j SHADE
For subjects in the shade.
k FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
Use under “daylight” fl uorescent lights.
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
Use under “warm white” fl uorescent lights.
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3
Use under “cool white” fl uorescent lights.
n INCANDESCENT
Use under incandescent lighting.
g UNDERWATER
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater
lighting.
127
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
N
•
In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for
example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance op-
tion suited to the light source.
•
White balance is adjusted for ash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g UNDERWATER
modes. Turn the ash o using other white balance options.
•
White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 310).
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white
balance option displays a ne-tuning
dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to
ne-tune white balance.
WB SHIFT
SET
N
•
To exit without ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-
lecting a white balance option.
•
You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when ne-tuning white bal-
ance.
128
6
The Shooting Menus
Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (col-
ored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tar-
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is lled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to
select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most
recent value and display the ne-tuning dialog).
•
If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK
to set white balance to the measured
value.
•
If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure
compensation and try again.
•
If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure com-
pensation and try again.
k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light
source.
N
Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “cold-
er” or deliberately produce colors that di er radically from those in real
life.
NOT CHANGESHIFT
CUSTOM 1
SHUTTER : NEW WB
COMPLETED !
SET CANCEL
129
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
1
Select k in the white balance menu.
The option currently selected for col-
or temperature will be displayed.
R:0 B:0
WHITE BALANCE
SET SHIFT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
2
Edit the color temperature using the
focus stick (focus lever) and press
MENU/OK.
A ne-tuning dialog will be dis-
played.
SHIFTSET
COLOR TEMPERATURE
N
•
You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10K by
rotating the rear command dial.
•
Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000K.
•
To exit without ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.
3
Highlight a ne-tuning amount using the focus stick.
4
Press MENU/OK.
The changes will be applied. The se-
lected color temperature will appear
in the display.
Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, ex-
pressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are
tinged with blue.
130
6
The Shooting Menus
DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of de-
tail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
V 100%
Choose for increased contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
W 200%
X 400%
O
Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.
N
•
If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either
V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-
ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-
ter button is pressed halfway.
•
W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO250 to ISO12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO500 to 12800.
131
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-
ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-
ditions.
STRONG
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
WEAK
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
OFF
Contrast reduction off.
N
•
WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO500 to 12800.
•
When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to ad-
just these settings manually, choose OFF.
132
6
The Shooting Menus
TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust the
appearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows and
highlights harsher, lower values to make
them softer.
CANCELSET
HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS
TONE CURVE
Option
Option
Description
Description
HIGHLIGHTS -2 to +4
SHADOWS -2 to +4
COLOR
Adjust color density.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose high-
er values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to
leave outlines visible.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
133
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
CLARITY
Increase de nition while altering tones in highlights and shad-
ows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased de -
nition, lower values for a softer e ect.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
O
The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.
LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save
times.
COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Option
Option
Description
Description
sRGB Recommended in most situations.
Adobe RGB For commercial printing.
134
6
The Shooting Menus
PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures or mov-
ies.
1
Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING tab.
2
Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pix-
el mapping.
O
•
Results are not guaranteed.
•
Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
•
Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-
vated.
•
Processing may take several tens of seconds.
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
Recall settings saved to custom settings banks 1 through
7(CUSTOM1 through CUSTOM7) using x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
Banks
Banks
NOTHING SELECTED CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7
N
If you would prefer not to recall saved settings, select NOTHING
SELECTED.
135
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Adjust settings as desired and save them to a custom settings
bank. Saved settings can be recalled using H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING> x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING.
Saving Custom Settings
Create a new custom settings bank.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
2
Highlight a destination bank for
the new settings (CREATE NEW C1
through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A con rmation dialog will be dis-
played.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
x
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
3
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Current camera settings will be saved
to the selected bank.
CUSTOM 1
OK
CREATE NEW OK?
CREATE NEW
C
AN
C
E
L
136
6
The Shooting Menus
Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
x
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
3
Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.
SAVE THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET THE CHANGES
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EDIT/CHECK
CUSTOM 1
4
The camera will display a list of shoot-
ing menu items; highlight an item you
wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.
EXIT
SAVE
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EDIT/CHECK
CUSTOM 1
5
Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.
137
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
N
If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> AUTO
UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIE
SETTING> FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the mov-
ie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the
changes will not be saved automatically.
•
To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the
list and press Q.
•
To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE
CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings,
select RESET THE CHANGES.
•
If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied with
the changes intact.
138
6
The Shooting Menus
Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the
settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-
named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the source bank and press
MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
x
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
3
Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EDIT/CHECK
COPY
CUSTOM 1
4
Highlight the destination bank (C1
through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A con rmation dialog will be dis-
played.
N
Any changes to custom settings in the
destination bank will be overwritten.
CUSTOM 3
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY TO
5
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.
OK
CANCEL
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?
COPY
139
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Deleting Custom Settings
Delete settings from selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
x
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
3
Highlight ERASE and press MENU/OK.
A con rmation dialog will be dis-
played.
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EDIT/CHECK
COPY
ERASE
CUSTOM 1
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Any custom settings saved to the se-
lected bank will be deleted.
OK
C
AN
C
E
L
CUSTOM 1
ERASE OK?
ERASE
140
6
The Shooting Menus
Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
x
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
3
Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and
press MENU/OK.
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
EDIT/CHECK
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
CUSTOM 1
4
Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select
SET.
The selected bank will be renamed.
141
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply auto-
matically.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ENABLE
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 7 apply automatically.
DISABLE
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 136).
142
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
AF MODE ALL SETTING
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
FOCUS AREA
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAY
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 82).
AF MODE
Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 80).
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
Create custom focus zones for use when ZONE is selected for AF
MODE.
Option
Option
ZONE CUSTOM 1 ZONE CUSTOM 2 ZONE CUSTOM 3
AF MODE ALL SETTING
Choose the focus area to be selected when AF MODE is ALL.
You can match the shooting style and set only the focus area to
be used. This can be set individually for when the focus mode is
S(AF-S) or C(AF-C).
Option
Option
AF-S AF-C
143
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for focus
mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according
to your subject or select Set 6 for custom
focus-tracking options.
OK
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Option
Option
Description
Description
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
A standard tracking option that works well with
the typical range of moving subjects.
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES &
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
DECELERATING SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to compensate for
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING
SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
subjects entering the focus area. Choose for sub-
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switch-
ing subjects.
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large
movements front to back and left to right.
SET 6 CUSTOM
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 144, 146).
144
6
The Shooting Menus
Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are
described below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long the
camera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
LOCKED ON
QUICK
SETS THE TRACKING
SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
SWITCH
ADJUST
Options
Options
01234
O
•
The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
•
The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensi-
tive the tracking system is to changes in
subject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which the
system attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ACCEL./DECEL.
STEADY
SETS THE SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
SWITCHADJUST
Options
Options
012
O
The higher the value, the more di culty the camera will have focusing
in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly re ective or low in contrast.
145
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
FRONTCENTER
AUTO
SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
SWITCHADJUST
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
AUTO
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
CENTER Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.
O
This option takes e ect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the di erent sets are listed below.
TRACKING
TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING
SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA
ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
SWITCHING
SET 1
SET 1
20AUTO
SET 2
SET 2
3 0 CENTER
SET 3
SET 3
22AUTO
SET 4
SET 4
0 1 FRONT
SET 5
SET 5
32AUTO
146
6
The Shooting Menus
Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.
1
Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS>
SET 6 CUSTOM.
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 6 CUSTOM
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
AUTO
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
RESETSET DETAIL
ADJUST
2
Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press the DRIVE/DELETE button.
3
Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in por-
trait orientation is stored separately from that used when the
camera is in landscape orientation.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.
147
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING>
AF MODE.
Options
Options
ON OFF
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders
of the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to
another.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ENABLE
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of the
display to another.
DISABLE Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display.
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se-
lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
grid.
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
grid.
148
6
The Shooting Menus
PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator
in some cases.
•
If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the
subject.
•
Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.
149
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it will
assign them priority over the background
and adjust settings appropriately for por-
traits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when face
detection is on.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FACE DETECTION
ON
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
•
g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
•
u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
•
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
•
v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off .
O
•
If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may
not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
•
In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a
whole rather than the portrait subject.
•
Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON auto-
matically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
150
6
The Shooting Menus
N
•
A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with
a white frame.
•
If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select
one automatically.
•
You can choose a di erent subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
•
When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one
eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
•
If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspend-
ed at the close of burst shooting.
•
Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-
entation.
•
If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are
hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
•
Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 310).
151
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SUBJECT
DETECTION ON
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
•
E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and
cats.
•
F BIRD: Camera detects and tracks focus on birds and in-
sects.
•
G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
for motor sports.
•
H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
•
I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes and drones.
•
J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver
compartments or front ends of trains.
OFF Subject detection off .
O
Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.
152
6
The Shooting Menus
N
•
A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
•
If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
•
You can choose a di erent subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
•
If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be sus-
pended at the close of burst shooting.
•
Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
•
Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 310).
153
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be
ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
•
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist op-
tions selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.
AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area
by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear
command dial.
154
6
The Shooting Menus
MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 89).
Option
Option
Description
Description
DIGITAL SPLIT
IMAGE
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)
split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of
the split image are correctly aligned.
DIGITAL
MICROPRISM
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK
HIGHLIGHT
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
peaking level.
OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
If ON is selected, the display con gured by MF ASSIST appears
only when the focus ring was turned during manual focus mode.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
MF ASSIST ends if no operations are performed for a set period after
the focus ring is rotated.
155
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the
selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-
cus mode.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
Pressing the center of the rear command dial cancels focus zoom.
•
The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
Options
ON OFF
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or
continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or
AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AF-S
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
AF-C
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 201).
156
6
The Shooting Menus
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of- eld scale.
Option
Option
Description
Description
PIXEL BASIS
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of fi eld
for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers
or other electronic displays.
FILM FORMAT
BASIS
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of
fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for ex-
ample as prints.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 201).
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera behaves when the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. Settings for AF-S and AF-C focus
modes can be selected separately.
Option
Option
Description
Description
RELEASE
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
FOCUS
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.
O
Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the
camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.
157
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF Focus limiter disabled.
CUSTOM
Limit focus to a range of distances defi ned by a minimum and
maximum.
•
OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
•
SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance be-
tween them.
PRESET1
Limit focus to a preset range.
PRESET2
O
The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may di er from the
actual focus distance.
N
•
The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:
-
You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus
range.
-
Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to in nity by rotating the focus ring.
•
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 201).
158
6
The Shooting Menus
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
TOUCH
SHOOTING
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your fi nger
on the display.
AF
AFOFF
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AFOFF icon.
•
In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
N
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
T
o disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for
D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING
>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
.
159
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
Mode
Operation performed
Operation performed
TOUCH SHOOTING
TOUCH SHOOTING AF-S/MF: Take a picture
AF
AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AREA
AREA
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
OFF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
160
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
CORRECTED AF FRAME
View a guide to the actual focus position
when framing shots in the OVF with the
subject close to the camera. When ON is
selected, the camera will display the fo-
cus position for objects approximately
50cm from the camera (
B
) in addition to
the standard AF frame (
A
). Pressing the
shutter button halfway displays a green
AF frame (
C
) at the actual focus position.
Normal display
Display when shutter
button is pressed halfway
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
The guide will not be displayed when the camera focuses at distanc-
es of less than 50 cm.
•
You can temporarily select OFF for the guide display by pressing the
center of the focus stick (focus lever).
161
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the
A
(SHOOTING SETTING) tab.
N
The options available vary with the shoot-
ing mode selected.
SHOOTING SETTING
SELF-TIMER
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMP
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
SPORTS FINDER MODE
PRE-SHOT
EXIT
SPORTS FINDER MODE
Take pictures using the crop in the center
of the display. Choose this option for pic-
tures of athletes, birds, and other moving
subjects.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
Pictures are taken using a 1.29× crop, reducing the picture angle by an
amount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.29×; the crop
is shown by a frame in the display.
OFF The 1.29× crop is disabled.
N
•
The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-
ing menu is xed at P.
•
The sports nder is not available in modes that o er an electronic
shutter.
162
6
The Shooting Menus
PRE-SHOT sJ
To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all the
way down and the resulting picture being recorded to the memory
card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic shutter when the
shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a series shots starting
just before the shutter button is pressed the rest of the way down.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONIC
SHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode
(P 168).
•
Flash photography is disabled.
163
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option
Option
Description
Description
R 2 SEC
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
S 10 SEC
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF Self-timer off .
If an option other than OFF is selected, the
timer will start when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.
9
O
•
Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in
front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
•
The self-timer turns o automatically when the camera is turned o .
164
6
The Shooting Menus
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remain
in e ect after the camera is turned o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other
situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
Options
ON OFF
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Con gure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.
1
Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
in the
A
(SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.
WITH EXTERNAL TIMER
WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
2
Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
and press MENU/OK.
Interval-timer settings will be dis-
played.
CANCELEND
INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES
INTERVAL
NUMBER OF TIMES
N
If you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH
EXTERNAL TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display,
where you can start interval-timer photography using the remote
release.
165
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
choose the interval and number of
shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.
START WAITING TIME
ESTIMATED START TIME
LATER
CANCELSTART
PM
4
Use the focus stick to choose the
starting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.
CANCEL
O
Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of
“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.
N
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
•
Check the battery level before starting.
•
To view the pictures taken so far, press the PLAY button during inter-
val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press the
PLAY button again or wait until the start of the next interval.
•
The display turns o between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
•
The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
•
The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are o during
interval-timer photography.
•
To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the
number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photogra-
phy started, set the number of shots to ∞.
166
6
The Shooting Menus
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-
ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL
TIMER SHOOTING> INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
•
In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
A(auto) option is selected for sensitivity.
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during in-
terval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not lon-
ger than the interval between photographs.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
This option takes e ect only when shutter speed is set to A(auto).
167
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAMES/STEP SETTING
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
and the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
•
FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence.
•
STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each
shot.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS
•
1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
•
CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.
FILM SIMULATION BKT
Choose the three lm simulation types used for lm simulation
bracketing (P 122).
FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes
(P 101).
PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 93).
168
6
The Shooting Menus
SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute
the shutter sound.
Option
Option
Description
Description
t MECHANICAL SHUTTER
Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
u MECHANICAL+
ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
shutter according to shooting conditions.
If s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER or u MECHANICAL+ELECTRONIC
is selected, shutter speeds faster than ¼ 000s can be chosen by
rotating the shutter speed dial to 4000 and then rotating the rear
command dial.
O
•
When using the electronic shutter, note the following:
-
Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
-
Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high
shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.
-
Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under uorescent lights
or other ickering or erratic illumination.
-
When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 279), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.
•
When t MECHANICAL SHUTTER is selected, exposure may be less
accurate at wider apertures (the maximum shutter speed varies with
the aperture, from ½ 000 s at f/2 to ¼ 000 s at f/4.5). The timing of the
switch from MECHANICAL SHUTTER to ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
when u MECHANICAL+ ELECTRONIC is selected also varies with
aperture.
N
The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:
•
Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 125–12800
•
Long exposure noise reduction has no e ect
•
The ash cannot be used
169
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce icker in pictures and the display when shooting under
uorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ALL FRAMES
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
FIRST FRAME
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the fi rst frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subse-
quent frames that fl icker may occur.
OFF Flicker reduction disabled.
O
•
Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
•
OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shut-
ter is used.
•
Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be ne-tuned to reduce ick-
er caused by LED lighting and the like.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
This option takes e ect only in modes S and M.
170
6
The Shooting Menus
IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or o .
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS Image stabilization on.
SHOOTING ONLY
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released.
OFF
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N
Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image sta-
bilization takes e ect.
ISO AUTO SETTING
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for use when ISO sensitivity is set to A(auto). Set-
tings for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 can be stored separately
(P 92).
xF CONVERSION LENS
Adjust settings for optional conversion lenses (P 330).
Option
Option
Description
Description
WIDE Choose when using an optional wide conversion lens.
TELE Choose when using an optional teleconversion lens.
OFF Choose when no conversion lens is attached.
171
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Take magni ed pictures at di erent focal lengths (P 94).
Option
Option
Description
Description
70mm
Take pictures using 2× zoom. O- and P-size pictures
are automatically cropped to size Q.
58mm
1
100mm
2
50mm
Take pictures using 1.4× zoom. O-size pictures are auto-
matically cropped to size P.
41mm
1
72mm
2
OFF Digital teleconverter off .
1 When a wide-angle conversion lens is attached.
2 When a telephoto conversion lens is attached.
xF ND FILTER
Selecting ON enables the camera’s built-in Neutral Density (ND)
lter, reducing exposure by the equivalent of 4 EV. This allows
slower shutter speeds or wider apertures to be used with bright-
ly lit subjects, making it possible to blur motion or soften back-
ground details without risk of overexposure.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
The ND lter can now be used during movie recording.
172
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:
•
Control the camera and take pictures remotely
•
Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
•
Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
•
Upload location data to the camera
N
For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
173
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust ash-related settings for still photography.
To display ash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the F(FLASH SETTING) tab.
FLASH SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
Built-In Flash
EXIT
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a ash control mode, ash mode,
or sync mode or adjust the ash level.
The options available vary with the ash.
N
For more information on ash settings, see
“External Flash Units” (P 332) in “Peripher-
als and Optional Accessories”.
ADJUST
END
Built-In Flash
M
ODE
RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye e ects caused by the ash.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FLASH Flash red-eye reduction only.
OFF Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off .
N
Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL ash control mode.
174
6
The Shooting Menus
TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting ash level with each shot, TTL ash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-
graphs.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING
FLASH
The camera emits a series of pre-fl ashes and locks fl ash
output at the metered value.
N
•
To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 319).
•
Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in e ect.
•
Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no
previously metered value exists.
LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the ash unit’s LED video light (if avail-
able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.
This setting can be con gured when a shoe-mounted ash unit
mounted with an LED light is being used.
Option
Option
Role of LED video light in still photography
Role of LED video light in still photography
CATCHLIGHT Catchlight
AF ASSIST AF-assist illuminator
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
OFF None
N
In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
175
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera ash unit as a command-
er for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control. This option is
available when the camera is used with clip-on ash units that
support Fuji lm optical wireless ash control.
Options
Options
Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF
N
In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the com-
mander and remote ash units. Separate channels can be used
for di erent ash systems or to prevent interference when multi-
ple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
Options
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
176
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Built-In Flash
Enable or disable the built-in ash.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Enable the built-in fl ash.
OFF
Disable the built-in fl ash. Choose this option when using op-
tional fl ash units mounted on the camera hot shoe or con-
nected via sync cable.
177
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust options for movies shot during still photography
using function buttons that have been assigned MOVIE
RECORDING RELEASE.
To display movie settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab.
MOVIE SETTING
HIGH SPEED REC
MOVIE MODE
MEDIA REC SETTING
F IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOST
EXIT
AUDIO SETTING
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
FREC FRAME INDICATOR
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
MOVIE MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 182). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
HIGH SPEED REC
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 183). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
MEDIA REC SETTING
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 184). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 189). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE BOOST
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 189). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
178
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING
Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording.
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off .
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected via the microphone/re-
mote release connector.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
phone.
LINE
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
179
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
Options
ON OFF
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut lter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
Option
Description
Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
180
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 206). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 191). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
181
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,
press MENU/OK in the movie shooting dis-
play and select the B(MOVIE SETTING)
tab.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE MODE
FSELF-TIMER
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
HIGH SPEED REC
EXIT
MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.
N
These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.
182
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose the
frame rate and the frame size and aspect
ratio.
MOVIE MODE
CANCELEND
1
In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-
light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the
desired frame size and aspect ratio (
A
) and press the stick
right.
•
Choose J16 : 9 for 6.2 K movies with an aspect ratio of
16 : 9.
•
Choose T16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for high-quality 4 K movies
with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
•
Choose V16 : 9 or 117 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ra-
tios of 16 or 17 to 9.
•
Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect
ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
3
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
frame rate (
B
) and press MENU/OK.
Options
Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P
N
The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.
183
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be
played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too eeting for the naked eye. Select ON to
choose the recording and playback rates separately.
N
Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders con-
nected via HDMI. In this case, a recording frame-rate of 200P or 240P
cannot be selected. Also note that the playback frame-rate cannot be set.
Frame Size
Options
Options
W16 : 9 W17 : 9
Recording
Options
Options
100P 120P 200P 240P
Playback
Options
Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P
N
•
High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
•
The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the
goal of maintaining the selected bit rate.
•
The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.
184
6
The Shooting Menus
F SELF-TIMER
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the start of recording.
•
The display shows the number of sec-
onds remaining before recording be-
gins.
•
To stop the timer before recording be-
gins, press DISP/BACK.
Options
Options
3 SEC 5 SEC 10 SEC OFF
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, com-
pression, and bit rate.
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, and
compression.
Destination
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for mov-
ies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
Z
Movies are saved solely to the memory card.
U
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.
185
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
File Type and Compression
File Type and Compression
Choose the movie le type and compression.
Option
Option
Description
Description
H.264 420 MOV
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP in-
terframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sam-
pling.
H.264 420 MP4
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded
to the web.
H.265 420 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0
chroma sub-sampling.
H.265 422 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2
chroma sub-sampling.
N
•
4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external
devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
•
Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files
are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
•
The options available for le type and compression vary with the op-
tions selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.
Bit Rate
Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
Options
Options
50Mbps 100Mbps 200Mbps
N
The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for high-
speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate may be
slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
186
6
The Shooting Menus
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.
HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start
and stop movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.25∶1. This makes it easier to match
crops after changing movie settings.
Options
Options
ON OFF
187
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Option
Option
Description
Description
t
The footage is processed using fi lm simulation and both
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
u
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
v
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
w
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in HLG format.
N
•
F-Log and FLog2 o er gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-
able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to
values between ISO500 and ISO12800 (F-Log) or between ISO1000
and ISO12800 (FLog2).
•
The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the in-
ternational ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO800 and ISO12800.
•
Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> F FILM SIMULATION in the
shooting menu.
188
6
The Shooting Menus
DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
VIDEO RANGE
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that
for 10-bit movies to 64–940.
FULL RANGE
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.
F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 93).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 169).
Options
Options
ON OFF
189
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F IS MODE
Choose the image stabilization mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
IBIS Enable in-body image stabilization (IBIS).
IBIS + DIS
Enable in-body (IBIS) and digital (DIS) image stabilization.
The crop is adjusted according to the option selected for
MOVIE MODE. This setting can compensate for more
severe camera shake.
OFF
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N
Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image sta-
bilization takes e ect.
F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Suitable for shots with no panning.
OFF Suitable for shots with panning.
N
Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image sta-
bilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 319).
190
6
The Shooting Menus
ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ZEBRA RIGHT
Right-slanting stripes.
ZEBRA LEFT
Left-slanting stripes.
OFF Stripes off .
ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
Options
Options
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
191
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the
command dials and touch-screen controls. You may nd this
helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being re-
corded with movies (P 32).
Options
Options
ON OFF
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during
movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie record-
ing.
192
6
The Shooting Menus
TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
Indicator lamp AF-assist illuminator
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT OFF
REAR z
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
FRONT OFF
REAR y
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
FRONT z
REAR z
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
FRONT z
REAR OFF
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
FRONT y
REAR y
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
FRONT y
REAR OFF
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
FRONT OFF
REAR OFF
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording.
193
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 134).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 135).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 141).
xF CONVERSION LENS
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 170).
xF ND FILTER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 171).
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 172).
194
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
FFILM SIMULATION
FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
FDYNAMIC RANGE
FCOLOR
FSHARPNESS
FHIGH ISO NR
FTONE CURVE
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 122).
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 124).
F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 126).
195
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
V100%
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 130).W200%
X400%
N
•
AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
•
W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO250 to ISO12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO500 to 12800.
•
This item is available when t is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING> F-Log/HLG RECORDING.
F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
196
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
Options
AUTO OFF
N
“Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this option.
197
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
F AF MODE
FAF-C CUSTOM SETTING
FSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MF
FMF ASSIST
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
FFOCUS AREA
xFWRAP FOCUS POINT
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 82).
O
The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MULTI The camera selects the focus area automatically.
WIDE/TRACKING
The camera tracks the subject automatically if the focus stick
(focus lever) is pushed to the center or the screen is touched
when the focus mode is C. The camera selects the focus
subject automatically when the focus mode is S.
AREA The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.
198
6
The Shooting Menus
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus
mode C.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-
ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-
ject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 144).
Options
Options
01234
O
•
The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
•
The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for
faster response times, lower values for slower response times.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 147). Changes to
one apply to the other.
199
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FACE DETECTION ON
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 149).
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off .
O
When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus us-
ing continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus
mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual
focus mode.
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 151).
O
The camera automatically switches to
continuous AF
when SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S.
Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode.
200
6
The Shooting Menus
F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual
focus can be suspended by pressing the shutter button halfway.
Options
Options
ON OFF
F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 89).
Option
Option
Description
Description
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
color and peaking level.
FOCUS METER
A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
HIGHLIGHT
Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
FOCUS MAP
Indicators for locations in and out of focus are displayed
on the screen.
OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 154).
201
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 155).
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 155). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 156). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 157). Changes to
one apply to the other.
202
6
The Shooting Menus
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
AF
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping
your subject in the display.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-
lected by tapping the display.
•
When shooting movies in focus mode M(MF), you can tap the
display before recording begins to focus on the selected point
using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to posi-
tion the focus point.
AREA
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start
and stop recording.
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at
any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-
lected by tapping the display.
•
In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to posi-
tion the focus area over your subject.
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
N
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
T
o disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for
D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING
>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
.
203
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
Mode
Operation performed
Operation performed
AF
AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AREA
AREA
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
OFF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in e ect once movie re-
cording begins.
Options
Options
ON OFF
204
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during lming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the P(AUDIO SETTING) tab.
AUDIO SETTING
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
LOW CUT FILTER
HEADPHONES VOLUME
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
WIND FILTER
EXIT
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off .
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.
205
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
phone.
LINE
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
Options
ON OFF
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
206
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut lter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
Option
Description
Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/re-
mote release connector is a microphone or a remote release.
Options
Options
m MIC n REMOTE
207
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame num-
ber) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q(TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.
TIME CODE SETTING
TIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTING
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
DROP FRAME
EXIT
TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and
playback.
Options
Options
ON OFF
START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME
Set the start time to the current time.
RESET Set the start time to 00:00:00.
COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
REC RUN Time is clocked only during movie recording.
FREE RUN Time is clocked continuously.
208
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-
ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and
the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match
the recording time to the time code.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
OFF Frames are not dropped.
N
•
The time code display varies with the option selected.
ON
OFF
•
Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
Options
ON OFF
209
Playback and the Playback
Menu
210
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.
O
For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
1/999
12/31/2024
A
L
F
VWX
YZ
f
R
U
k
j
i
h
l
m
g
H
K
G
I
J
a
b
N MOPQ
ST
d
c
e
B C D E
211
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
A
Date and time ..................................47, 49, 271
B
Communication status
C
Frame.io image transfer order
D
Image transfer status
E
Frame.io upload progress
F
Frame number .............................................. 306
G
Protected image ...........................................224
H
Bluetooth host ..............................................240
I
Bluetooth ON/OFF
J
Frame-number display
K
Location data................................................308
L
Low battery ......................................................46
M
Image quality................................................119
N
Movie mode .................................................. 182
O
HEIF ..................................................................121
P
Image size ......................................................118
Q
Film format .................................................... 185
R
Film simulation ............................................ 122
S
Dynamic range ............................................130
T
HDR ..................................................................105
U
White balance .............................................. 126
V
Sensitivity ..........................................................91
W
Exposure compensation ...............................95
X
Aperture ...............................................69, 74, 75
Y
Time code .......................................................207
Z
Shutter speed .....................................69, 70, 75
a
Playback mode indicator .............................55
b
Movie icon ........................................................65
c
HDR image ....................................................105
d
Red-eye removal indicator ........................173
e
Advanced fi lter..............................................112
f
Face detection indicator ............................149
g
Digital teleconverter ...................................171
h
Frame.io connection status ......................255
i
Photobook assist indicator .......................231
j
DPOF print indicator ................................... 233
k
Rating ..............................................................227
l
Voice memo ..................................................226
m
Gift image .........................................................55
212
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators during playback.
Standard Information o
2022.12.31 1/999
1/99912/31/2024
1/99912/31/2024
NEXT
Info display
213
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes each
time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.
Basic data Info display 1
2022.12.31 1/999
1/99912/31/2024 1/99912/31/2024
NEXT
LENS
23.0
mm
F
5.6
FOCAL LENGTH
23.0
mm
COLOR SPACE sRGB
LENS MODULATION OPT.
ON
S.S
F ISO
BACK
1/999
NEXT
12/31/2024 12:10 AM
Info display 3 Info display 2
Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point.
Press again to return to full-frame playback.
214
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom and
multi-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to play-
back zoom or multi-frame playback. Rotate the rear command dial
to right or left, the display changes as shown. The display changes
in reverse order when rotate the dial to opposite direction.
N
To cancel playback zoom or multi-frame playback, press DISP/BACK or
MENU/OK.
Maximum zoom Medium zoom
Playback zoom
Full-frame playback
Multi-frame playback
Nine-frame view Hundred- frame view
215
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Pictures
Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK,
or the center of the rear command dial.
N
The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE.
Scroll
When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick
(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the
image not currently visible in the display.
Navigation window
Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-
mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.
N
•
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame.
•
In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.
216
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.
ERASE
RAW CONVERSION
PLAY BACK MENU
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
IMAGE ROTATE
EXIT
VOICE MEMO SETTING
RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to
modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format
1
Display a RAW picture.
2
Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3
Press MENU/OK.
A list of settings will be displayed.
CREATE
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPE
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE
RAW CONVERSION
CANCEL
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
setting.
5
Press the focus stick right to display
options.
RAW CONVERSION
200
%
400
%
100
%
217
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
6
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.
7
Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to
adjust additional settings.
8
Press the Q button.
A preview of the copy will be displayed.
9
Press MENU/OK.
The copy will be saved.
N
RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-
ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.
218
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from
RAW to another format are:
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
Create a copy using the settings in eff ect at the time
the photo was taken.
FILE TYPE Choose a fi le format.
IMAGE SIZE Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows
for natural-looking results when photographing
high-contrast scenes.
FILM SIMULATION Simulate the eff ects of diff erent types of fi lm.
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs tak-
en using FILM SIMULATION> a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT Add a fi lm grain eff ect.
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds,
yellows, and greens.
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
blues.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT Smooth complexions.
WHITE BALANCE Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY Increase defi nition.
219
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
COLOR SPACE Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
HDR MODE Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows.
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Process the picture using super-resolution imaging
to create an enlarged copy with a longer apparent
focal length.
O
Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen
when the picture was taken.
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
Options
Options
JPEG TIFF 8bit TIFF 16bit
220
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-
tures.
O
Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME Delete pictures one at a time.
SELECTED FRAMES Delete multiple selected pictures.
ALL FRAMES Delete all unprotected pictures.
FRAME
1
Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete.
N
•
A con rmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be
sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
•
Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the fo-
cus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to
delete.
221
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
SELECTED FRAMES
1
Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.
•
Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
•
To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.
3
When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a
con rmation dialog.
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-
tures.
N
Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1
Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
A con rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.
N
•
Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
•
If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.
222
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.
1
Display the desired picture.
2
Select CROP in the playback menu.
3
Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the
focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.
4
Press MENU/OK to display a con rmation dialog.
5
Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
le.
N
•
The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the
cropped copy.
•
If the size of the nal copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
•
All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.
223
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.
1
Display the desired picture.
2
Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
3
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a con rmation
dialog.
4
Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
le.
N
The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.
224
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the
following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
SET ALL Protect all pictures.
RESET ALL Remove protection from all pictures.
O
Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N
•
Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smart-
phones or tablets removes upload marking.
•
Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the Fn2 button
during playback.
225
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.
1
Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB.
2
Display the desired picture.
3
Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.
5
Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in
the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the
camera.
N
•
Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-
tating pictures.
•
The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other
devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when
viewed on a computer or on other cameras.
•
Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB are auto-
matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.
226
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.
1
Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
2
Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
3
Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-
cord the memo. Recording ends after 30s or when you re-
lease the dial.
N
•
The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
•
Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
•
Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
•
To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front com-
mand dial.
•
A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
•
Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then
pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-
ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME.
227
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
RATING
Rate pictures using stars.
1
Select RATING in the playback menu.
2
Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the
rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars
(“I”).
N
•
The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front com-
mand dial to choose a picture.
•
The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL/AFL button
in single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.
•
Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
•
Ratings cannot be applied to:
-
Protected pictures
-
Movies
-
“Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
228
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth (P 240).
1
Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE> SELECT IMAGE&
TRANSFER.
N
Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.
2
Mark pictures for upload.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
•
To display only pictures that meet
selected criteria, press DISP/BACK be-
fore marking begins.
•
To select all pictures, press the Q but-
ton.
•
Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL/AFL button also selects all pic-
tures between them.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
FINISH/SETTINGSELECT
SELECT RANGESELECT ALL
3
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be upload-
ed.
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
229
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
Filtering Pictures
To display only pictures that meet selected cri-
teria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection
dialog and select FILTERING.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
O
Selecting FILTERING removes any existing upload marking.
N
•
Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
•
The following cannot be selected for upload:
-
Protected pictures
-
Movies
-
RAW images
-
“Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
•
If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is o .
•
When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the
picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.
230
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:
•
Control the camera and take pictures remotely
•
Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
•
Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
•
Upload location data to the camera
N
•
For downloads and other information, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
•
If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the
smartphone using the Fn1 button.
SLIDE SHOW
View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to start
and press the focus stick (focus lever) right or left to skip ahead
or back. Press DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view on-
screen help. The show can be ended at any time by pressing
MENU/OK.
N
The camera will not turn o automatically while a slide show is in prog-
ress.
231
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
Create books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1
Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU> PHOTOBOOK
ASSIST.
2
Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-
ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the
book is complete.
N
•
Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
•
The rst picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-
cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.
3
Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-
lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new
book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.
N
•
Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
•
Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.
232
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.
Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-
screen instructions.
•
EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
•
ERASE: Delete the book.
233
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.
1
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
2
Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-
tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.
3
Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
print order.
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to choose the number of
copies (up to 99).
N
To remove a picture from the order,
press the focus stick down until the
number of copies is 0.
Total number
of prints
Number of copies
N
Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5
The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.
N
•
The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
•
Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.
•
If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-
other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.
01
PRINT ORDER
(
DPOF
)
SHEETS
SETFRAME
DPOF:
00001
234
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fuji lm instax SHARE printers, rst
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.
1
Turn the printer on.
2
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-
nect to the printer.
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
CONNECTING
CANCEL
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start.
100-0020
SET CANCEL
instax-12345678
PRINTER PRINT
N
•
Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
•
The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
•
The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
235
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High De nition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).
16:9
3:2
Options
Options
16 : 9 3 : 2
N
Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.
236
MEMO
237
Network/USB Features and
Settings
238
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Overview
This chapter outlines features that can among other things
be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and
take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer.
Supported Features
This camera supports the following features:
Feature
Feature
Description
Description
P
P
Connecting to the
Connecting to the
smartphone app
smartphone app
Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload
pictures or control the camera remotely while the
smartphone displays the view through the lens.
240
USB card readers
USB card readers
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone
via USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
244
Web camera
Web camera
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use
as a webcam.
249
instax printers
instax printers Print pictures on connected instax printers. 250
Upload to Frame.io
Upload to Frame.io Upload fi les to Frame.io. 252
RAW processing
RAW processing
Harness the power of the camera’s image
processing engine when processing RAW pictures
on a computer.
259
Saving and Loading
Saving and Loading
Settings
Settings
Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a
computer.
260
239
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Overview
Camera indicator lamp display
The camera indicator lamp shows the
status of its connection to Frame.io and
the like.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Connection status
Connection status
Blinks red No network connection.
Glows red No network connection; pictures awaiting upload.
Blinks orange Connected to network but not to Frame.io.
Blinks orange and red
Connected to network but not to Frame.io; pictures
awaiting upload.
Blinks green Ready for upload to Frame.io.
Blinks green and red
Ready for upload to Frame.io; pictures awaiting
upload.
The EVF/LCD Displays
The status of the connection to Frame.io and
the like is also shown by an icon in the electron-
ic view nder or LCD monitor.
Icon
Icon
Connection status
Connection status
No network connection.
Connected to network but not to Frame.io.
Ready for upload to Frame.io.
240
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® to
copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera re-
motely while previewing the view through the lens in the
smartphone display.
N
The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when
copying pictures to the smartphone.
Installing Smartphone Apps
Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and
camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smart-
phone app. Visit the following website and install the desired
apps on your phone.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
N
The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system.
Connecting to a Smartphone
Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®.
1
Press the x(Bluetooth) button when
the camera is in shooting mode.
N
You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the DISP/BACK
button during playback.
241
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
2
Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Bluetooth
3
Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK.
Bluetooth ON/OFF
PAIRING
Bluetooth
4
Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone
with the camera.
More information is available at the following website:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
When pairing is complete, the cam-
era and smartphone will automati-
cally connect via Bluetooth. A smart-
phone icon and a white Bluetooth
icon will appear in the camera display
when a connection is established.
N
•
Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automati-
cally connect to the camera when the app is launched.
•
Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smart-
phone reduces the drain on the battery.
242
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Using the Smartphone App
Read this section for information on the options available for
downloading pictures to your smartphone using the smart-
phone app.
N
Before proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF.
Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App
You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using the
smartphone app.
N
More information is available from the following website:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING> AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB
setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired de-
vice.
N
•
If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is o .
•
Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> RESIZE
IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu en-
ables compression, reducing le size for upload (P 263).
•
Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING> SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB
setting menu.
244
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload
pictures from the camera.
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone
Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB,
select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.
For Customers Using Android Devices
How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB
connector with which your smartphone is equipped.
Type-C
Type-C
Ready a cable equipped with connectors matching the USB
(Type-C) connector on the camera.
Third-party USB cable
Type-C connector (plug) Type-C connector (plug)
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
245
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
3
Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.
N
If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the
“Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and move
on to the next step.
4
On your smartphone, tap the noti cation “Connected to USB
PTP”.
5
From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”.
The app will automatically start and allow you to import pho-
tos and movies to your smartphone.
N
If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on the
app, please try again from step 3.
246
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
For Customers Using iOS
An Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter is required.
Supplied USB cable
An Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter
Type-C connector (plug) Use an Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter
Type-A connector (plug)
1
Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER
SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.
2
Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
3
Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.
Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your
smartphone.
O
•
A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and
other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors.
•
The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Lightning cable. Use an Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter.
247
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connecting the Camera and Computer
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
3
Turn the camera o .
4
Turn the computer on.
5
Connect a USB cable.
USB connector (Type-C)
O
The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be
suitable for data transfer.
6
Turn the camera on.
7
Copy pictures to your computer.
•
Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer
using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or oth-
er software. Use a card reader to copy les over 4GB in size.
•
Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using
apps supplied with the operating system.
248
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
O
•
Turn the camera o before disconnecting the USB cable.
•
When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-
serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the
computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard.
•
Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-
necting the camera.
•
If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted,
there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-
able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer
pictures.
•
Make sure that the indicator lamp is o or lit green before turning
the camera o .
•
Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card.
•
Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.
•
In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a
network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-
alone computer.
•
Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-
connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in
progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images
copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has
ceased to be displayed.
•
The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or
Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet
connection.
249
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Using the Camera as a Webcam
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a
webcam.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB WEBCAM for CONNECTION MODE.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 247).
4
Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a web-
cam.
250
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
instax SHARE Printers
Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE
printers.
Establishing a Connection
Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and
password.
The Printer Name (SSID) and Password
The printer name (SSID) can be found on the
bottom of the printer; the default password is
“1111”. If you have already chosen a di erent
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.
251
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
instax SHARE Printers
Printing Pictures
1
Turn the printer on.
2
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-
nect to the printer.
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
CONNECTING
CANCEL
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK.
100-0020
SET CANCEL
instax-12345678
PRINTER PRINT
N
•
Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
•
The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
•
The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
4
The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start.
252
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
Upload les to Frame.io (P 349).
N
Con rm that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date be-
fore proceeding.
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connect to Frame.io via wireless LAN.
1
Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud>
CONNECT.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
NOT CONNECTED
UPLOAD STATUS
UPLOAD SETTING
SELECT FILE TYPE
DISCONNECT
CONNECT
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
2
Select WIRELESS LAN.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
NOT CONNECTED
GET PAIRING CODE
WIRELESS LAN
CONNECT
3
Select ACCESS POINT SETTING.
Select IP ADDRESS SETTING to
choose the IP address manually as
described in “Connecting Using an IP
Address” (P 254).
FINISH
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
4
Select SIMPLE SETUP.
N
To select a wireless LAN router or en-
ter the router SSID manually, choose
MANUAL SETUP.
SET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC
(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)
SIMPLE SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
ACCESS POINT SETTING
253
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
5
Follow the on-screen instructions to
ready the wireless LAN router.
N
You also have the option of connect-
ing using a PIN. Display the camera
PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus
lever) up and enter it on the wireless
LAN router.
SIMPLE SETUP
PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING
CANCEL
CONNECT BY PIN CODE
6
Press MENU/OK when setup is com-
plete.
MANUAL SETUP
REGISTRATION COMPLETED
END
7
Once connected, select GET PAIRING
CODE.
A pairing code will be displayed.
AP001234567
WIRELESS LAN
SUCCESS
GO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
GET PAIRING CODE
CHANGE NETWORK
FINISH
8
Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and en-
ter the pairing code displayed on the camera.
9
Upload les to Frame.io (
P 256
).
254
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Connecting Using an IP Address
Connect to Frame.io using a manually-created network/USB set-
ting pro le giving the IP address and other network settings.
1
Select MANUAL.
N
Select AUTO to assign the camera an
IP address automatically.
000.000.000.000
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
N
EXT
IP ADDRE
S
A
CC
E
SS
P
WIRELESS LAN
SS
PO
LA
AUTO
MANUAL
2
Enter an IP address.
DNS SERVER ADDRESS
GATEWAY ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS SETTING
•
Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP
address.
IP ADDRESS
SET
ENTER CANCEL
•
Select SUBNET MASK and enter a
subnet mask.
ENTER CANCEL
SET
SUBNET MASK
255
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
•
Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and en-
ter a gateway address.
SET
GATEWAY ADDRESS
ENTER CANCEL
•
Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS and
enter a DNS server address.
DNS SERVER ADDRESS
SET
ENTER CANCEL
Connection Status
The status of the connection to Frame.io is
shown by an icon in the electronic view nder
or LCD monitor.
Icon
Icon
Connection status
Connection status
(white)
Connected to Frame.io.
(amber)
Camera has temporarily suspended upload to
Frame.io. To resume, select Frame.io Camera
to Cloud> UPLOAD SETTING> TRANSFER/
SUSPEND> TRANSFER.
(gray)
Not connected to Frame.io.
(red)
Frame.io server has set camera status to “paused”.
To restore connection, clear “paused” status using
computer or other device.
256
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Uploading Items to Frame.io
Uploading Selected Items Using “Frame.io Camera to Cloud”
1
Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud in network/USB settings
menu.
2
Select UPLOAD SETTING> SELECT
IMAGE & TRANSFER.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
AAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAA
WIRELESS LAN
CONNECTED
ROOT CERTIFICATE
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
UPLOAD SETTING
N
•
The NETWORK and Frame.io eld show the status of the connection
to Frame.io.
•
The PROJECT and USER elds show information supplied to Frame.
io using a computer or other device. Note that some characters may
not display correctly, in which case they will be replaced by question
marks (“?”).
3
Mark items for upload.
Highlight photos and movies and
press MENU/OK to mark them for up-
load.
•
To display only items that meet se-
lected criteria, press DISP/BACK be-
fore marking begins.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
FINISH/SETTINGSELECT
SELECT RANGESELECT ALL
•
To select all items, press the Q button.
•
Selecting any two items with the AEL/AFL button also selects
all items between them.
257
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
4
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected items will be uploaded
to Frame.io.
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
BACK
Filtering Items
To display only items that meet selected crite-
ria, press DISP/BACK in the selection dialog and
select FILTERING.
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
BACK
O
Selecting FILTERING removes any existing upload marking.
N
•
Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 items.
•
If ON is selected for Frame.io Camera to Cloud> IMAGE TRANSFER
WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is
o .
258
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
Uploading Photos and Movies as They Are Taken
Photos and movies shot with ON selected for Frame.io Camera
to Cloud> UPLOAD SETTING> AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
in the network/USB setting menu are automatically marked for
upload.
Selecting Photos and Movies for Upload During Playback
If HFrame.io TRANSFER ORDER is selected for DBUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> aFn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can mark les for up-
load or change or remove their upload marking using the Fn1
button during playback.
259
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
RAW Processing
Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the
camera’s image processing engine when processing RAW
pictures on a computer.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION
MODE.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 247).
4
Launch X RAW STUDIO.
RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO.
N
Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
260
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Saving and Loading Settings
Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers
using FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION
MODE.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 247).
4
Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X
Acquire.
N
Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
261
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
To access network/USB settings from
the shooting or playback display, press
MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB
setting) tab.
EXIT
NETWORK/USB SETTING
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
AIRPLANE MODE
PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
CONNECTION MODE
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
RESET WIRELESS SETTING
INFORMATION
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smart-
phone-related settings.
N
Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of the
smartphone app.
PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smart-
phone app has been installed.
SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION
Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the cam-
era has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO
CONNECTION to exit without connecting.
DELETE PAIRING REG.
Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet.
N
The selected device will be removed from the pairing list.
262
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than the
smartphone) or end pairing with selected devices.
Bluetooth ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect with
paired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app.
Options
Options
ON OFF
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC.
Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data from
paired smartphones or tablets.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app is
running. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera
location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have not
been updated for over 30 minutes.
NAME
Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless
network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default).
263
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures to
paired smartphones or tablets even while o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE
Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing le
size for upload.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
The pictures on the camera memory card are not a ected.
•
Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M.
WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING
Choose the band for wireless LAN connections.
Options
Options
2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n) 5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac)
O
•
Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels
in the 5GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2GHz (W52) band is
permitted before selecting the 5GHz option.
•
The options available vary with the country or region of sale.
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the format or formats used for upload. Pictures can be
uploaded in JPEG format and/or HEIF.
264
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
AIRPLANE MODE
Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetooth
features.
Options
Options
ON OFF
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to optional Fuji lm instax SHARE
printers (P 250).
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Adjust settings for use with Frame.io.
CONNECT
Connect to Frame.io.
Option
Option
Description
Description
WIRELESS LAN Connect via wireless LAN.
GET PAIRING CODE
View the pairing code for connection to the Frame.io proj-
ect.
N
The pairing code can only be viewed when the camera is connected
to Frame.io.
DISCONNECT
End the connection to the Frame.io project and terminate the
network connection.
265
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of les uploaded to Frame.io. You can select or
deselect each le type individually.
Options
Options
MOV/MP4 JPEG RAW
HEIF TIFF
UPLOAD SETTING
Adjust settings Frame.io upload settings.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
Mark picture for upload.
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to automatically mark photos and movies for upload
as they are taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume upload to Frame.io.
Options
Options
TRANSFER SUSPEND
266
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, upload of les to Frame.io will continue while
the camera is o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
ROOT CERTIFICATE
ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a root certi cate to the camera for use with Frame.io.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOAD FROM STORAGE
MEDIA
Copy the root certifi cate from the camera memory card.
DELETE Delete the current root certifi cate.
UPLOAD STATUS
View Frame.io upload status.
TRANSFER QUEUE
View a list of the les awaiting upload.
RESET TRANSFER ORDER
Remove upload marking from all les selected for upload to
Frame.io.
267
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
CONNECTION MODE
Adjust settings for connection to external devices.
Option
Option
Description
Description
USB CARD READER
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically
enables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to
the computer. The camera functions normally when not con-
nected.
USB WEBCAM
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a
webcam.
USB RAW CONV./
BACKUP RESTORE
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatical-
ly enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The
camera functions normally when not connected.
•
USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the cam-
era’s image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW fi les
to other formats while maintaining image quality.
•
BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and load
camera settings. Reconfi gure the camera in an instant or
share settings with other cameras of the same type.
N
For information on compatible computer software, see “Software and
Services for Use with Your Camera” (P 347).
268
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones,
or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
The camera switches between power delivery and data trans-
fer automatically.
POWER SUPPLY ON/
COMM OFF
The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing
the drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled.
POWER SUPPLY
OFF/COMM ON
The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from,
the connected device.
O
The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from
devices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM
ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection
may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY
ON/COMM OFF is selected.
N
Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while the
camera is o .
INFORMATION
View the camera’s MAC, Bluetooth, and wireless network IP ad-
dresses.
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING
Reset network/USB settings to default values.
269
The Setup Menus
270
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and
choose USER SETTING.
USER SETTING
DATE/TIME
bAREA SETTING
FORMAT
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
TIME DIFFERENCE
EXIT
a
FORMAT
To format a memory card:
1
Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
2
A con rmation dialog will be dis-
played. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
FORMAT OK?
ERASE ALL DATA
OK
CANCEL
FORMAT
N
To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or
press DISP/BACK.
O
•
All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the
memory card. Be sure important les have been copied to a comput-
er or other storage device.
•
Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.
N
The format menu can also be displayed by pressing and holding
the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding the
DRIVE/DELETE button.
271
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
b AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or o .
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Daylight saving time on.
OFF Daylight saving time off .
DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:
1
Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. To change the order in which the year, month, and
day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the
focus stick up or down.
3
Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
272
The Setup Menus
9
TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to
the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the
di erence between your local and home time zone:
O
Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before select-
ing a local time zone using g LOCAL.
1
Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local time
zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.
N
Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and
press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time
zone, select h HOME.
Options
Options
g LOCAL h HOME
N
If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three
seconds when the camera is turned on.
273
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 311).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 311).
274
The Setup Menus
9
SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OK Clean the sensor immediately.
WHEN SWITCHED ON
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
turned on.
WHEN SWITCHED OFF
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-
era turns off in playback mode).
N
Sensor cleaning does not completely remove dust from the sensor.
SHUTTER COUNT
View the approximate number of times the shutter has been re-
leased.
N
Other actions may also increment the counter, for example turning
the camera o , changing the view nder display selection, or choosing
playback mode.
275
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
SOUND & FLASH
Select OFF to disable the speaker, ash, illuminator, and self-tim-
er lamp in situations in which camera sounds and lights may be
unwelcome.
Options
Options
ON OFF
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Use the rmware stored on a memory card to update the rm-
ware for the camera, lenses, and other accessories (P 362).
276
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
RESET
Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.
1
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STILL MENU RESET
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
MOVIE MENU RESET
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
SET-UP RESET
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
INITIALIZE
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
default values.
2
A con rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK.
REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, and
other certi cates, select D USER SETTING> REGULATORY in the
setup menu.
277
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.
EXIT
SOUND SETTING
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
AF BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
FREC START/STOP VOLUME
tELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
tELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
278
The Setup Menus
9
OPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-
trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
t ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical
shutter.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
279
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
t ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical shutter.
Options
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
Options
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
280
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
Options
Options
012345678910
281
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.
SCREEN SETTING
EVF COLOR
VIEW MODE SETTING
EVF BRIGHTNESS
BRIGHT FRAME POSITION MEMORY
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD COLOR
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
EXIT
VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF/OVF (electronic/optical view-
nder), or LCD monitor view modes (P 20).
BRIGHT FRAME POSITION MEMORY
The bright frame moves to show the actual crop when the shut-
ter button is pressed halfway. Choose whether the bright frame
remains in the new position once the button is released.
Normal display
Display when shutter
button is pressed halfway
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The bright frame stays in the new position when the shutter but-
ton is released.
OFF
The bright frame returns to its normal position when the shutter
button is released.
282
The Setup Menus
9
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic view nder.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected
level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
MANUAL
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.
EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic view nder.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic view nder.
1
Adjust colors using the focus stick
(focus lever).
SET CANCEL
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
2
Press MENU/OK.
283
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.
1
Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).
2
Press MENU/OK.
284
The Setup Menus
9
IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again
to cancel zoom.
1.5 SEC
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
0.5 SEC
OFF Pictures are not displayed after shooting.
N
•
Colors may di er slightly from those in the nal image.
•
“Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the view nder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
Options
Options
ON OFF
285
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
PREVIEW WB
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a fl ash during daylight.
OFF
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-
tion in situations in which both exposure and white balance
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a fl ash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the e ects of lm simulation, white balance,
and other settings are visible in the monitor.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The eff ects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-
to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will diff er from
those in the fi nal picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the eff ects of monochrome and sepia settings.
OFF
The eff ects of fi lm simulation, white balance, and other set-
tings can be previewed in the monitor.
286
The Setup Menus
9
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to
BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
Options
ON OFF
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 27).
FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
Option
Option
F
F
GRID 9
GRID 9
G
G
GRID 24
GRID 24
H
H
HD FRAMING
HD FRAMING
Display
P P
P
For “rule of thirds” compo-
sition.
A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the
crop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of the
display.
N
Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed
using D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 25).
287
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
Options
ON OFF
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
Options
METERS FEET
288
The Setup Menus
9
OVF, IMAGE DISP.
Choose how the camera displays pictures after shooting when
the OVF is used. Pictures are displayed only for the length of time
selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FULL SCREEN The pictures fi ll the viewfi nder.
SMALL WINDOW The pictures are displayed in the electronic rangefi nder (ERF).
N
FULL SCREEN is selected automatically when CONTINUOUS is cho-
sen for D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP.. Pictures are not displayed
after shooting when OFF is chosen.
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display
(P 25).
289
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF/OVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the optical or electron-
ic view nder. The indicators displayed can be selected using
D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
12800
OFF ON
O
Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF/OVF) (P 17).
N
If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and o (OFF) (P 319).
290
The Setup Menus
9
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-
dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
OFF ON
O
Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 19).
N
If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and o (OFF) (P 319).
291
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP>
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF/OVF)
or LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).
R2
R1
L4
L3
L2
L1
Scale
Expo. DISP.
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
A
Expo. DISP.
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
B
d Scale
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
C
L1, L2, L3, L4
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side
of the screen.
D
R1, R2, R3, R4
Choose up to four large icons for display on the right
side of the screen.
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
Option
Option
Description
Description
HIGH CONTRAST High contrast.
STANDARD Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.
292
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smart-
phone.
Options
Options
ON OFF
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during still photography.
Options
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK
F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during movie recording.
Options
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK
293
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
o S.S OPERATION
EXIT
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the
focus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, or
right.
PUSH
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF Pressing the center of the stick has no eff ect.
EDIT FOCUS AREA
Press the center of the stick to choose the focus area size.
If g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING is on, you can instead position
the focus frame over the desired face, eye, animal, or
object.
ZOOM
Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus
area (P 85).
RESET TO CENTER Press the center of the stick to select the center focus area.
TILT o
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no eff ect.
DIRECT AF POINT
SELECTION
Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display.
EDIT FOCUS AREA
Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-area
display and choose the focus area.
295
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose the roles played by the command dials.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 1
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aperture
(APERTURE)
1
to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1.
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 2
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-
erture (APERTURE)
1
, exposure compensation (EXP.
COMPENSATION)
2
, sensitivity (ISO)
3
, or no role (NONE)
to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3.
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3
REAR COMMAND DIAL
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-
erture (APERTURE)
1
, exposure compensation (EXP.
COMPENSATION)
2
, sensitivity (ISO)
3
, or no role (NONE)
to the rear command dial.
1 Aperture set to A (auto) and COMMAND selected for D
BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> APERTURE RING SETTING (A).
2 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C.
3 C selected for sensitivity.
N
•
COMMAND DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and
holding the center of the front command dial.
•
You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle
through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT
COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3.
o S.S. OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed ne-tuning using the com-
mand dials.
Options
Options
ON OFF
296
The Setup Menus
9
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to
choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can
be adjusted separately.
Option
Option
Description
Description
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.
SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AF-S
•
ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
•
OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
AF-C
•
ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
•
OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be ad-
justed separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual fo-
cus).
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot
taken in burst mode.
297
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released
to test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can
be displayed.
OFF
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.
FOCUS RING
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-
crease the focus distance.
Options
Options
X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise)
FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-
ment of the focus ring.
Option
Option
Description
Description
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
LINEAR
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is ro-
tated, but the focusing speed is unaff ected by the speed the ring
is rotated.
298
The Setup Menus
9
CONTROL RING SETTING
Set functions assigned to the control ring.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STANDARD
The function assigned to the control ring varies with the
shooting mode (P 12).
WHITE BALANCE Assign white balance to the control ring.
FILM SIMULATION Assign fi lm simulation to the control ring.
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. Assign the digital teleconverter to the control ring.
OFF No function assigned.
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AE&AF ON WHEN
PRESSING
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
AE&AF ON/OFF
SWITCH
Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and
remain locked until it is pressed again.
AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white
balance (AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white
balance at the value metered by the camera when AUTO is se-
lected for white balance.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AWB ON WHEN
PRESSING
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
AWB ON/OFF SWITCH
Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to
end the lock.
299
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
APERTURE RING SETTING (A)
Choose whether the front command dial can be used to adjust
aperture when aperture is set to A (auto).
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts aperture automatically.
COMMAND Aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial.
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback.
Option
Option
Description
Description
a SMARTPHONE
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for transfer.
If the camera is not currently paired with a smartphone,
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options will be
displayed.
d SELECT &
SMARTPHONE
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can
be selected for upload to a smartphone with which the
camera is paired (P 228). If the camera is not currently
paired with a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING options will be displayed instead.
HFrame.io TRANSFER
ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload
to Frame.io.
r WIRELESS
COMMUNICATION
The button can be used for wireless connections.
300
The Setup Menus
9
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
OFF Touch zoom disabled.
c TOUCH FUNCTION
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Enable touch-function gestures.
OFF Disable touch-function gestures.
a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
301
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
EVF/OVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while
the view nder is active. The area used for touch controls can be
selected from:
Option
Option
Description
Description
6
All.
0
Right half.
2
Top right quarter.
4
Bottom right quarter.
1
Left half.
3
Top left quarter.
5
Bottom left quarter.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
302
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOCK SETTING
Choose from the following:
•
UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
•
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION
SELECTION list.
•
SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION
SELECTION
Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is
chosen for LOCK SETTING.
N
•
The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at
any time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock
the controls, press and hold the button again.
•
When VIEWFINDER SELECTOR (ROTATE AND HOLD) is chosen
with VIEWFINDER SELECTOR in FUNCTION SELECTION, a function
assigned to the operation rotating and holding the view nder selec-
tor is locked. When VIEWFINDER SELECTOR is chosen, the EVF/OVF/
ERF selection function is locked.
303
The Setup Menus
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.
POWER MANAGEMENT
AUTO POWER OFF
PERFORMANCE
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
EXIT
AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns o automati-
cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned o
manually.
Options
Options
5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF
304
The Setup Menus
9
PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and view nder display perfor-
mance.
Option
Option
Description
Description
BOOST
Boost camera focus and viewfi nder display performance.
The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
NORMAL
Choose for standard focus and viewfi nder display perfor-
mance and battery endurance.
ECONOMY
Limit autofocus and viewfi nder performance. This option
off ers better battery endurance than does NORMAL.
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is
selected for PERFORMANCE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
EVF/LCD LOW LIGHT
PRIORITY
Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shadows
easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting.
EVF/LCD RESOLUTION
PRIORITY
Display resolution is increased to make details easier to see.
EVF FRAME RATE
PRIORITY (100P)
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing motion.
305
The Setup Menus
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will rst
display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, auto-
matically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns o automatically.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STANDARD
The camera turns off automatically when its temperature
reaches the STANDARD value.
HIGH
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than the
STANDARD value, extending the time available to re-
cord movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could result in
low-temperature burns, this option should only be used af-
ter mounting the camera on a tripod or taking other steps
to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.
306
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to le management settings.
To access le management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.
SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
EXIT
EDIT FILE NAME
SELECT FOLDER
GEOTAGGING
COPYRIGHT INFO
FRAME NO.
New pictures are stored in image les named
using a four-digit le number assigned by
adding one to the last le number used. The
le number is displayed during playback as
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether le num-
bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS
Numbering continues from the last fi le number used or the fi rst
available fi le number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate fi le names.
RENEW
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new
memory card is inserted.
N
•
If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be
disabled. Turn the camera o and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
•
Selecting
D
USER SETTING> RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the le number.
•
Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may di er.
Frame number
Directory
number
File
number
307
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
EDIT FILE NAME
Change the le name pre x. sRGB images use a four-letter pre x
(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter pre x (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
Option
Option
Default pre x
Default pre x
Sample le name
Sample le name
sRGB DSCF ABCD0001
AdobeRGB _DSF _ABC0001
SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SELECT FOLDER
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to
highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
CREATE FOLDER
Enter a fi ve-character folder name. The new folder will be
created with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.
COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are re ected only in images taken after the changes are made.
Option
Option
Description
Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright
information recorded with existing images is not aff ected.
308
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
309
Shortcuts
310
Shortcuts
10
Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-
tom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-func-
tion gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option
Shortcut Option
Description
Description
P
P
“My menu”
Add frequently-used options to this custom
menu, which can be viewed by pressing
MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
311
The Quick Menu
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Qbutton.
Use the Q menu to view or change the options
selected for frequently-used menu items.
313
The function buttons
Use the function buttons for direct access to
selected features.
319
Touch-function
gestures
Use touch function button fl ick gestures (T-Fn1,
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to
selected features.
324
311
Shortcuts
10
MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the
shooting display and select the
E
(MY
MENU) tab.
SELF-TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
FILM SIMULATION
GRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
IS MODE
gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
MY MENU
EXIT
O
The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.
MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:
1
In the setup menu, select D USER
SETTING> x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.
N
To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.
To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.
MY MENU SETTING
ADD ITEMS
REMOVE ITEMS
RANK ITEMS
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and
press MENU/OK. Options that can be
added to “my menu” are highlighted
in blue.
IMAGE QUALITY
MY MENU SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
SELECT CANCEL
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
N
Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.
312
Shortcuts
10
MY MENU
3
Select a menu to be registered and press the MENU/OK button.
Press the MENU/OK button again to return to the menu selec-
tion screen.
4
Select a menu to be registered next
and press the MENU/OK button. Select
the order of the menus to be regis-
tered and press the MENU/OK button.
MOVE SAVE
1 IMAGE SIZE
2
IMAGE QUALITY
SELECT ITEM LOCATION
5
Repeat Step 4 and register “my menu”.
To exit “my menu” registration, press the DISP/BACK button.
N
“My menu” can contain up to 16 items.
313
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To
view the quick menu, press the Qbutton.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu o ers di erent options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSET
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE
Default
Default
A
A
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
*
I
I
HIGHLIGHT TONE
B
B
AF MODE
J
SHADOW TONE
C
C
DYNAMIC RANGE
K
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
D
WHITE BALANCE
L
PHOTOMETRY
E
HIGH ISO NR
M
SELF-TIMER
F
IMAGE SIZE
N
g FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
G
G
IMAGE QUALITY
O
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
H
H
FILM SIMULATION
P
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
* If no settings bank is currently selected for x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shoot-
ing mode will be displayed instead.
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B
–
P
, which can be changed.
314
Shortcuts
10
Movie recording
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSET
Default
Default
A
A
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
*
E
E
APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
B
B
S.S. (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
F
F
ISO (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
C
C
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/
ASPECT RATIO
G
G
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
D
F WHITE BALANCE
H
H
F WHITE BALANCE COLOR
TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED)
* If no settings bank is currently selected for F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shoot-
ing mode will be displayed instead.
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B
–
H
, which can be changed.
315
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Viewing and Changing Settings
1
Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
highlight items and rotate the rear
command dial to change.
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSET
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE
N
To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.
3
Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
N
•
The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
•
Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you
can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button
(P 319).
•
To disable the Q(quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING> Q BUTTON SETTING.
316
Shortcuts
10
Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:
1
Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.
N
The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photogra-
phy and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.
2
The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick
(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and
press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.
N
The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.
317
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHENk SELECTED)
•
HIGHLIGHT TONE
•
SHADOW TONE
•
COLOR
•
SHARPNESS
•
CLARITY
•
HIGH ISO NR
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
•
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
•
MF ASSIST
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
SELF-TIMER
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
xF CONVERSION LENS
•
xF ND FILTER
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
FLASH COMPENSATION
•
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO
•
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
•
BIT RATE
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
SOUND & FLASH
•
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
•
EVF/LCD COLOR
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
318
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Movies)
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHENk SELECTED)
•
HIGHLIGHT TONE
•
SHADOW TONE
•
COLOR
•
SHARPNESS
•
HIGH ISO NR
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
•
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
•
MF ASSIST
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
xF CONVERSION LENS
•
xF ND FILTER
•
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO
•
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
•
BIT RATE
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F SELF-TIMER
•
MOVIE AF MODE
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
S.S.
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
•
APERTURE
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
•
ISO
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
SOUND & FLASH
•
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
•
EVF/LCD COLOR
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
319
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the se-
lected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
Back/Top-of-Camera Function Buttons
Back/Top-of-Camera Function Buttons
Function buttons
Function buttons
Default
Default
A
AEL/AFL button AE/AF LOCK
B
Center of rear command dial
Center of rear command dial FOCUS CHECK
C
Fn1 button
Fn1 button FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
D
Q (quick menu) button
Q (quick menu) button QUICK MENU
320
Shortcuts
10
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Function buttons
Function buttons
Default
Default
A
Fn2 button
Fn2 button CONTROL RING SETTING
B
View nder selector (rotate and hold)
xF ND FILTER
321
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING op-
tion in the setup menu.
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
RAW
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
CLARITY
•
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
•
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
•
FOCUS AREA
•
FOCUS CHECK
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
1
•
RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
•
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
•
AF RANGE LIMITER
•
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
•
MF ASSIST ON/OFF
•
SPORTS FINDER MODE
•
PRE-SHOT sJ
•
SELF-TIMER
•
AE BKT SETTING
•
FOCUS BKT SETTING
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
•
ISO AUTO SETTING
•
IS MODE
•
xF CONVERSION LENS
•
xF ND FILTER
•
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
TTL-LOCK
•
MODELING FLASH
•
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
2
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F SELF-TIMER
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
ZEBRA SETTING
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
•
VIEW MODE SETTING
•
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
•
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
•
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
•
HISTOGRAM
•
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
•
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
•
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
322
Shortcuts
10
•
CONTROL RING SETTING
•
SPOT METERING LOCK
•
AE LOCK ONLY
2
•
AF LOCK ONLY
2
•
AE/AF LOCK
2
•
AF-ON
2
•
AWB LOCK ONLY
2
•
LOCK SETTING
•
PERFORMANCE
•
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
•
SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION
•
Bluetooth ON/OFF
•
QUICK MENU
•
PLAYBACK
•
NONE
1 Selection via the function buttons is not available when the OVF is displayed.
2 Cannot be assigned to the viewfi nder selector (rotate and hold).
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
323
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASH
If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-
ed ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test- re the
ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling ash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock ash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>
TTL-LOCK MODE (P 174).
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been as-
signed can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to
C1 (CUSTOM 1). Pressing the button a second time restores the
previous settings.
SPOT METERING LOCK
If SPOT METERING LOCK is selected, you can press the control to
meter your subject using SPOT metering regardless of the option
currently selected for A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY.
The option selected for A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY
can be restored by pressing the control again.
324
Shortcuts
10
Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.
N
Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-
tion gestures, select ON for DBUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION.
Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the di erent gestures are:
Touch-Function Gestures
Touch-Function Gestures
Default
Default
A
T-Fn1 ( ick up)
T-Fn1 ( ick up) HISTOGRAM
B
T-Fn2 ( ick left)
T-Fn2 ( ick left) FILM SIMULATION
C
T-Fn3 ( ick right)
T-Fn3 ( ick right) WHITE BALANCE
D
T-Fn4 ( ick down)
T-Fn4 ( ick down) ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
325
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures
The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected us-
ing the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
RAW
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
CLARITY
•
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
•
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
•
FOCUS AREA
•
FOCUS CHECK
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
*
•
RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
•
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
•
AF RANGE LIMITER
•
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
•
MF ASSIST ON/OFF
•
SPORTS FINDER MODE
•
PRE-SHOT sJ
•
SELF-TIMER
•
AE BKT SETTING
•
FOCUS BKT SETTING
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
•
ISO AUTO SETTING
•
IS MODE
•
xF CONVERSION LENS
•
xF ND FILTER
•
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
TTL-LOCK
•
MODELING FLASH
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F SELF-TIMER
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
ZEBRA SETTING
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
•
VIEW MODE SETTING
•
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
•
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL
MODE
•
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
•
HISTOGRAM
•
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
•
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
•
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
326
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
•
CONTROL RING SETTING
•
SPOT METERING LOCK
•
LOCK SETTING
•
PERFORMANCE
•
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
•
SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION
•
Bluetooth ON/OFF
•
QUICK MENU
•
PLAYBACK
•
NONE
* Selection via the touch-function gestures is not available when the OVF is
displayed.
N
To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
327
Peripherals and Optional
Accessories
328
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with the following optional acces-
sories available from Fuji lm. For information on other ac-
cessories, see “Accessories from Fuji lm” (P 344).
The AR-X100 Adapter Ring
1
Remove the front ring.
N
If you have trouble removing the front
ring, grip the entire ring and rotate it
as shown.
2
Attach the adapter ring as shown,
with the projections facing out.
O
•
Keep the front ring and lens cap in a safe place when not in use.
•
Attach the adapter ring AR-X100 before attaching LH-X100 lens hood,
PRF-49/PRF-49S protector lter, or thirdparty lters.
329
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Optional Accessories
The LH-X100 Lens Hood
Attach the adapter ring before attaching
the lens hood.
N
Align the indentations and rotate as shown.
PRF-49 and PRF-49S Protective Filters
Attach the adapter ring before attaching
the lter.
330
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Optional Accessories
Conversion Lenses
1
Remove the front ring.
N
If you have trouble removing the front
ring, grip the entire ring and rotate it
as shown.
2
Attach the conversion lens.
O
Keep the front ring and lens cap in a safe place when not in use.
331
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Using a Conversion Lens
The camera automatically adjusts settings when it detects that
an optional dedicated WCL-X100 II or TCL-X100 II teleconversion
lens is attached. An icon (x/y) will appear in the display. The
image size will also be changed automatically to P when focal
length is 41mm or 72mm, to Q when 58mm or 100mm.
N
•
The camera does not detect WCL-X100 or TCL-X100 conversion lens-
es automatically. Select WIDE or TELE for A SHOOTING SETTING>
xF CONVERSION LENS in the photo menu or B MOVIE
SETTING> xF CONVERSION LENS in the movie menu.
•
Because the optical view nder does not
cover the full eld of view of wide conver-
sion lenses, the bright frame is replaced
by out-of-frame indicators when a wide
conversion lens is attached. For accurate
framing, compose pictures using the elec-
tronic view nder or LCD monitor.
•
The built-in ash may fail to light the entire subject. We recommend
using an optional external ash designated for use with this camera.
•
Select OFF for A SHOOTING SETTING> xF CONVERSION LENS
and B MOVIE SETTING> xF CONVERSION LENS when a con-
version lens is not in use.
332
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
External ash units are more powerful than their built-in
counterparts. Some can function as commander ash units
controlling remote units via optical wireless ash control.
O
You may be unable to test- re the ash in some circumstances, for ex-
ample when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.
Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASH
SETTING> RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the ash is re ected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The ash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½ 000s or slow-
er.
Optional Flash Units from Fuji lm
The camera can be used with optional Fuji lm shoe-mounted ash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party ash units that apply over 300V to the camera hot
shoe.
333
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Using an External Flash
1
Connect the unit to the camera.
2
In shooting mode, select FLASH
FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH
SETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the ash unit.
FLASH SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
Built-In Flash
EXIT
Menu
Menu
Description
Description
P
P
Built-In Flash
Displayed when ON is selected for F FLASH SETTING>
Built-In Flash.
114
SYNC
TERMINAL
Displayed when no compatible fl ash unit is connected or
if the connected unit uses only the X-contact on the hot
shoe.
334
SHOE MOUNT
FLASH
Displayed when an optional fl ash unit other than the
EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on.
335
COMMANDER
(OPTICAL)
Displayed if an optional fl ash unit functioning as a com-
mander for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control is
connected and turned on.
338
N
SYNC TERMINAL will be displayed if OFF is selected for F FLASH
SETTING> Built-In Flash and no supported shoe-mounted ash
is attached.
3
Highlight items using the focus stick
(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-
mand dial to change the highlighted
setting.
ADJUST
END
Built-In Flash
M
ODE
4
Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into e ect.
334
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
SYNC TERMINAL
SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the built-in ash is lowered and
either no ash unit, or an incompatible ash unit, is mounted on
the hot shoe.
END
ADJUST
SYNC TERMINAL
MODE
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
Choose from the following options:
•
M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than
the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the
unit uses long fl ashes or has a slow response time.
•
D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
B
Sync
Choose whether the fl ash is timed to fi re immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
The Sync Terminal
Flash units requiring a sync cable connection cannot be used.
335
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
The following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted ash unit is attached and turned on.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
N
To prevent the built-in ash ring when a shoe-mounted ash unit is
attached, select OFF for F FLASH SETTING> Built-In Flash.
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
The fl ash control mode selected with the fl ash unit. This can
in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-
able vary with the fl ash.
•
TTL: TTL mode. Adjust fl ash compensation (
B
).
•
M: The fl ash fi res at the selected output regardless of subject
brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (
B
).
•
MULTI: Repeating fl ash. Compatible shoe-mounted fl ash
units will fi re multiple times with each shot.
•
D (OFF): The fl ash does not fi re. Some fl ash units can be
turned off from the camera.
336
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
B
Flash compensation/
output
The options available vary with fl ash control mode.
•
TTL: Adjust fl ash compensation (the full value may not be
applied if the limits of the fl ash control system are exceed-
ed). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the select-
ed value is added to the value selected with the fl ash unit.
•
M/MULTI: Adjust fl ash output (compatible units only).
Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the fl ash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
C
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possible;
fl ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
337
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
D
Sync
Control fl ash timing.
•
H (1ST CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately after the shut-
ter opens (generally the best choice).
•
I (2ND CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately before the
shutter closes.
E
Zoom
The angle of illumination (fl ash coverage) for units that sup-
port fl ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
F
Lighting
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
•
J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
•
K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
•
L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for
more even lighting.
G
LED light
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-
raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (
M
/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (
N
/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-
light and an AF-assist illuminator (
O
/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
G
Number of ashes
*
Choose the number of times the fl ash fi res each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
H
Frequency
*
Choose the frequency at which the fl ash fi res in MULTI mode.
* Full value may not be applied if limits of fl ash control system are exceeded.
338
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control.
ADJUST
END
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
MODE
Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control o ers a choice of
four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical
signals between the commander and remote ash units. Sepa-
rate channels can be used for di erent ash systems or to pre-
vent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The ash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and ash mode
and ash level adjusted separately for
each group.
BB
A
C
339
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
(group A)
Choose fl ash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
•
TTL: The units in the group fi re in TTL mode. Flash com-
pensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
•
TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can
specify the output of the selected group as a percent-
age of the other and adjust overall fl ash compensation
for both groups.
•
M: In mode M, the units in the group fi re at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless
of subject brightness or camera settings.
•
MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating fl ash mode. All units will fi re
multiple times with each shot.
•
D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not fi re.
B
Flash control mode
(group B)
C
Flash control mode
(group C)
D
Flash compensation/
output (group A)
Adjust fl ash level for the selected group according to
option selected for fl ash control mode. Note that the full
value may not be applied if the limits of the fl ash control
system are exceeded.
•
TTL: Adjust fl ash compensation.
•
M/MULTI: Adjust fl ash output.
•
TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and
adjust overall fl ash compensation.
E
Flash compensation/
output (group B)
F
Flash compensation/
output (group C)
340
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
G
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-
lected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
picon displayed when the shutter button is pressed
halfway indicates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo
is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possi-
ble; fl ash level is adjusted according to subject bright-
ness. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
H
Sync
Control fl ash timing.
•
H (1ST CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
•
I (2ND CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately before the
shutter closes.
I
Zoom
The angle of illumination (fl ash coverage) for units that sup-
port fl ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
341
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
J
Lighting
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
•
J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-
ducing coverage.
•
K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
•
L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage
for more even lighting.
K
Commander
Choose the group for units functioning as a command-
er for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clip-
on fl ash units that support Fujifi lm optical wireless remote
fl ash control.
•
Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
•
Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
•
Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
•
OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not aff ect the fi nal picture.
K
Number of ashes
Choose the number of times the fl ash fi res each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
L
Channel
Choose the channel used by the commander for commu-
nication with the remote fl ash units. Separate channels
can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent in-
terference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
L
Frequency
Choose the frequency at which the fl ash fi res in MULTI
mode.
342
MEMO
343
Technical Notes
344
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
The following accessories are available from Fuji lm.
For the
latest information on the accessories available in your re-
gion, check with your local Fuji lm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W126S: Additional high-capacity NP-W126S rechargeable batteries can be pur-
chased as required.
Battery chargers
Battery chargers
BC-W126S: Replacement battery chargers can be purchased as required. At
+20 °C/+68 °F, the BC-W126S charges an NP-W126S in about 150 minutes.
Remote releases
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time ex-
posure (
⌀2.5mm).
Stereo microphones
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.
345
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
Shoe-mounted ash units
Shoe-mounted ash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL fl ash control, this clip-on fl ash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the fl ash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifi lm optical wireless fl ash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote fl ash unit for remote wireless
fl ash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 fl ash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL fl ash control, this clip-on fl ash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the fl ash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote fl ash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless com-
mander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS
*
wireless communication standard developed
by Nissin Japan, this wireless fl ash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on fl ash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-42: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL fl ash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL fl ash control.
EF-20: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports TTL fl ash control (manual fl ash control is not supported).
Tripod grips
Tripod grips
TG-BT1: Record movies or take photographs while holding this Bluetooth tripod
grip.
Leather cases
Leather cases
LC-X100V: This leather case comes with a shoulder strap made of the same mate-
rial. Pictures can be taken and batteries and memory cards inserted or removed
with the camera still in its case.
346
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
Grip belts
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip.
Conversion lenses
Conversion lenses
TCL-X100 II: Increases the focal length of the camera lens.
WCL-X100 II: Reduces the focal length of the camera lens and increases its angle
of view.
Adapter rings
Adapter rings
AR-X100: An aluminum adapter ring used when attaching the LH-X100 lens hood
or ⌀49 mm fi lters available from third-party suppliers.
Lens hoods
Lens hoods
LH-X100: This aluminum lens hood comes with an AR-X100 adapter ring made of
the same material. The adapter ring is required when attaching the hood.
Protective lters
Protective lters
PRF-49/PRF-49S: A fi lter used to protect the lenses of X100-series cameras (re-
quires the AR-X100 adapter ring).
instax SHARE printers
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax fi lm.
347
Technical Notes
12
Software and Services for Use with Your
Camera
The camera can be used with the following software and
services. For the latest information on software available
from Fuji lm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a
smartphone or tablet.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conver-
sion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of
charge from the Fuji lm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converter-
ex-powered-by-silkypix/
N
•
“RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
•
For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-
powered-by-silkypix/
348
Technical Notes
12
FUJIFILM RAW Converter
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into oth-
er formats. FUJIFILM RAW Converter is available free of charge
from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/a/leaflet-fujifilm#rawconverter
N
Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.
Capture One
Capture One work ow software from Capture One A/S supports
tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other
formats.
https://www.captureone.com/a/leaflet-fujifilm
O
The camera does not support tethered photography.
N
Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.
FUJIFILM X Acquire
Save and load camera settings. Recon gure the camera in an in-
stant or share settings with other cameras of the same type.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/
O
The camera does not support tethered photography.
349
Technical Notes
12
Software and Services for Use with Your Camera
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW les to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Send still images and movies directly from the camera to the
Frame.io platform via a network.
https://frame.io/
350
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
•
Read Instructions
Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.
•
Retain Instructions
Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
•
Heed Warnings
Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
•
Follow Instructions
Follow Instructions: All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
Installation
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-
bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-
pany. For video products intended to operate from battery
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fi t into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fi t, contact your electri-
cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the polarized plug.
Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with
a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fi t into a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-
place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the grounding type plug.
Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in a risk of fi re or electric shock.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never
be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
or other similar surface.
This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-
lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is
provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been ad-
hered to. This video product should never be placed near or
over a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-
ter—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,
and the like.
Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-
tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the appliance.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance
should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-
turer.
An appliance and cart combination
should be moved with care. Quick
stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the appliance and
cart combination to overturn.
Antennas
Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable
system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-
tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-
ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
Ground Clamp
t
Electric Service Equipment
e Equipment
A
A
ntenn
a
Le
ad
in
W
ir
e
A
A
Antenna
An
Discharge Unit
D
(NEC SECTION
N
810-20)
8
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding Electrode
System (NEC ART 250. PART H)
Groun
d
in
g
Con
d
uctors
(
NE
C
SECTION 810-21
)
351
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power
lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system,
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
Use
Use
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into
this video product through openings as they may touch dan-
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in
a fi re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the
video product.
Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and
power-line surges.
Service
Service
Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualifi ed service personnel.
Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from
the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualifi ed service person-
nel under the following conditions:
•
When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
•
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
video product.
•
If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
•
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
been damaged.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-
ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualifi ed technician to restore
the video product to its normal operation.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance — this indicates a need for service.
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-
ifi ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as
the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
fi re, electric shock or other hazards.
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this video product, ask the service technician to perform
safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-
er operating condition.
Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes
•
Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these
safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.
•
After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
WARNING
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious in-
jury can result if the information is ignored.
CAUTION
CAUTION
This icon indicates that personal injury or
material damage can result if the informa-
tion is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information re-
quires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-
resent the following:
AC
DC
Class II equipment (The construction of the product
is double-insulated.)
WARNING
WARNING
Unplug
from power
socket
If a problem arises, turn the camera o , remove the bat-
If a problem arises, turn the camera o , remove the bat-
tery, and disconnect the USB cable.
tery, and disconnect the USB cable. Continued use of
the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting
any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state
can cause a fi re or electric shock. Contact your Fu-
jifi lm dealer.
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
era or connecting cables.
era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or
connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid nd its way into the camera or connecting
Should liquid nd its way into the camera or connecting
cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, and
cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, and
disconnect the USB cable.
disconnect the USB cable. Continued use of the cam-
era can cause a fi re or electric shock. Contact your
Fujifi lm dealer.
352
Technical Notes
12
WARNING
WARNING
Do not use in
the bathroom
or shower
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower.
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
can cause a fi re or electric shock.
Do not
disassemble
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-
er open the case).
er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fi re or electric shock.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts.
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-
tion cord.
tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and
cause a fi re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujifi lm dealer. Do not use cables with
bent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This
can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not
use shooting, playback, or any other operations
of the camera while operating a car or other ve-
hicle. This can result in you falling down or being
involved in a traffi c accident. If you take pictures
while walking, pay attention to your surroundings.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
thunderstorm.
thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as speci ed.
Do not use the battery except as speci ed. Load the
battery as shown by the indicator.
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-
charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could result
in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or
leaking, causing fi re, burns, or other injury.
Use only batteries speci ed for use with this camera. Do
Use only batteries speci ed for use with this camera. Do
not use voltages other than the power supply voltage
not use voltages other than the power supply voltage
shown.
shown. The use of other power sources can cause
a fi re.
WARNING
WARNING
If the battery leaks and uid gets in contact with your
If the battery leaks and uid gets in contact with your
eyes, skin or clothing, ush the a ected area with clean
eyes, skin or clothing, ush the a ected area with clean
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.
number right away.
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
those speci ed here.
those speci ed here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with the
camera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a ash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
Using a ash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment.
visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-
tographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-
longed use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suff er from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or
similar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of ammable objects, explo-
Do not use in the presence of ammable objects, explo-
sive gases, or dust.
sive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
battery terminals with insulation tape.
battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries could cause the
battery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
out of the reach of small children.
out of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-
ments that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,
causing strangulation, and the fl ash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.
353
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations a ected by oil
Do not use this camera in locations a ected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust.
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fi re
or electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures.
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-
tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a fi re.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can
cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the charger in a cloth
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the charger in a cloth
or blanket.
or blanket. This can cause heat to build up and dis-
tort the casing or cause a fi re.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not t
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not t
securely into the outlet.
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-
caution could result in fi re or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan
to use the camera for an extended period, remove the
to use the camera for an extended period, remove the
battery.
battery. Failure to do so can cause a fi re or electric
shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
power socket.
power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the
power socket can cause a fi re.
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
out of the slot too quickly. Use your nger to hold it and
out of the slot too quickly. Use your nger to hold it and
gently release the card.
gently release the card. Injury could result to those
struck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting.
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
camera.
camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a fi re or electric shock. Contact your Fujifi lm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
tions.
tions.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, re or
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, re or
the like.
the like.
354
Technical Notes
12
The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read
the appropriate sections.
WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or
cause leakage, overheating, fi re, or explosion.
Li-ion Batteries
Li-ion Batteries
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion
battery.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
L
L
Notes on the Battery
Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use.
Charge the battery one or two days before use.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when
not in use.
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary,
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and
insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating
devices.
L
L
Charging the Battery
Charging the Battery
The battery can also be charged using an optional BC-W126S
battery charger. Charging times will increase at ambient tem-
peratures below +10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do
not attempt to charge the battery at temperatures above
+40 °C (+104 °F); at temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the
battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
L
L
Battery Life
Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will
hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-
vice life and should be replaced.
L
L
Storage
Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-
mately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-
move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.
L
L
Cautions: Handling the Battery
Cautions: Handling the Battery
•
Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-
laces or hairpins.
•
Do not expose to fl ame or heat.
•
Do not disassemble or modify.
•
Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
•
Use with designated chargers only.
•
Dispose of used batteries promptly.
•
Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
•
Do not expose to water.
•
Keep the terminals clean.
•
The battery and camera body may become warm to the
touch after extended use. This is normal.
L
Caution:
Disposal
Disposal
Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
355
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Using the Camera
•
Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources,
including artifi cial light sources or natural light sources
such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
•
Strong sunlight focused through the viewfi nder may dam-
age the panel of electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Do not aim
the electronic viewfi nder at the sun.
Take Test Shots
Take Test Shots
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
functioning normally. FUJIFILMCorporation cannot accept
liability for damages or lost profi ts incurred as a result of
product malfunction.
Notes on Copyright
Notes on Copyright
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing
of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked
to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
Handling
Handling
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are
being recorded.
Liquid Crystal
Liquid Crystal
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action
indicated should any of the following situations arise:
•
If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and
running water.
•
If liquid crystal enters your eyes, fl ush the aff ected eye with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
assistance.
•
If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly
with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-
iting, then seek medical assistance.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are
always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and
images recorded with the product are unaff ected.
Trademark Information
Trademark Information
Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of
FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces
included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Tai-
wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Camera to
Cloud, Frame.io, Lightroom and Photoshop are either regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States
and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and
Wi-Fi Protected Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of
such marks by Fujifi lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC
logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark
of the CFA (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a
trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPO-
RATED. USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks
of USB Implementers Forum. AirGlu™ is a trademark or regis-
tered trademark of Atomos. All other trade names mentioned
in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
Electrical Interference
Electrical Interference
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-
ment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the
camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
Color Television Systems
Color Television Systems
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-
vision telecasting specifi cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
television system adopted mainly in European countries and
China.
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera fi le format in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-
or reproduction during printing.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-
ware without the permission of the applicable governing
bodies is prohibited.
Lenses and Other Accessories
•
Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
•
Fujifi lm will not be held liable for performance issues or
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.
356
Technical Notes
12
NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-
lowing measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and re-
ceiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diff erent
from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifi cations not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-
junction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-
ernment’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Government.
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specifi c Absorption Rate, or SAR.
The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are
conducted using standard operating positions accepted by
the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certifi ed
power level in all tested frequency bands.
Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
this product must be used with a Fujifi lm-specifi ed fer-
rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
the product you have purchased. Please call
1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
recycle this battery.
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Di-
vision 2, Chapter4, Article 4, Appliance Ef-
fi ciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609
357
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
For Customers in Canada
For Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-
dian ICES-003.
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-
terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada.
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientifi c evi-
dence does not show that any health problems are asso-
ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while
being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health
eff ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does
not produce heating eff ects causes no known adverse health
eff ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not
found any biological eff ects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological eff ects might occur, but such fi ndings
have not been confi rmed by additional research. X100VI has
been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-
nel mobile satellite systems.
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
packaging indicates that this product shall not
be treated as household waste. Instead it should
be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of
electrical and electronic equipment.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-
vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
as household waste.
If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-
mulators please dispose these separately according to your
local requirements.
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-
sources. For more detailed information about recycling this
product, please contact your local city offi ce, your household
waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-
thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
that they are to be disposed of separately.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.
Storage and Use
Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:
•
exposed to rain, steam, or smoke
•
very humid or extremely dusty
•
exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day
•
extremely cold
•
subject to strong vibration
•
exposed to strong magnetic fi elds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet
•
in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides
•
next to rubber or vinyl products
358
Technical Notes
12
Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
•
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
•
RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF230003 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x100vi/pdf/x100vi_doc-yny.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x100vi/pdf/x100vi_doc-yny_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
•
Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):
WLAN 2.4 GHz: 2.37 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 9.84 dBm
Bluetooth: -6.42 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States
embargoes goods.
•
Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device
Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device
.
. Fujifi lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that
may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than off ered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to
ensure safety and prevent malfunction.
•
Use only in the country in which the device was purchased.
Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujifi lm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
•
Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference.
Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in
the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference that
may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of
other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band.
•
The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
•
Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-
tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
-
Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed
on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access
rights.
-
Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
-
Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by
providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
•
The following may be punishable by law:
The following may be punishable by law:
-
Disassembly or modifi cation or this device
-
Removal of device certifi cation labels
•
This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters.
This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-
ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
•
To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions.
To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confi rm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the aff ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifi lm representative.
359
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
•
Do not use this device on board an aircraft.
Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-
uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off . This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
•
Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Speci c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
Speci c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certifi ed output power level in
all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.038 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.
U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujifi lm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH
Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany
360
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes
•
Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
•
After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
WARNING
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious
injury can result if the information is ig-
nored.
CAUTION
CAUTION
This icon indicates that personal injury or
material damage can result if the informa-
tion is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information re-
quires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
WARNING
WARNING
Do not
immerse
Do not immerse in or expose to water.
Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution can cause a fi re or electric
shock.
Do not
disassemble
Do not disassemble (do not open the case).
Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause fi re, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts.
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
nders.
nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause fi re or
electric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day.
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fi re.
Keep out of the reach of small children.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This product
could cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects.
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fi re
or burns.
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
store out of direct sunlight.
store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the
lens can cause fi re or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod.
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-
jects, causing injury.
361
Technical Notes
12
Product Care
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with
a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-
tly with a piece of Fuji lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning uid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in
place.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-
age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING> SENSOR
CLEANING.
362
Technical Notes
12
Firmware Updates
When the rmware has been updated, and features have
been added and/or changed, update the rmware.
N
After updating to the latest rmware, the features of the camera may
di er somewhat from what is listed in this manual.
Downloading Firmware
First download the latest rmware and save it to a memory card.
For the method to download the rmware, refer to the following
website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Updating Firmware
Firmware can be updated in the following ways.
Updating the Firmware When Starting the Camera
Insert a memory card containing the new rmware into the cam-
era. While pressing the DISP/BACK button, turn on the camera. The
rmware can be updated. After the update is nished, turn the
camera o once.
Updating the Firmware From the Setup Menus
Insert a memory card containing the new rmware into the cam-
era. Select D USER SETTING> FIRMWARE UPDATE to update
the rmware.
363
Technical Notes
12
Firmware Updates
Updating the Firmware Using a Smartphone App (manual update)
If you are using a smartphone app, you can update the rmware
from the app. For details, refer to the following website.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
Updating the Firmware Using a Smartphone App (automatic update)
If FUJIFILM XApp Ver. 2.0.0 or later is used, the latest rmware will
be automatically downloaded to the camera from your smart-
phone.
1
When using the camera, a confi rma-
tion screen will be displayed if the up-
date is ready.
Select START.
CANCELSTART
READY FOR FIRMWARE UPDATE
N
If CANCEL is selected, the con rmation screen will be displayed
again when the camera is turned on on the next day or later.
2
When the selection screen is displayed,
select UPDATE NOW.
IN THE MENU
FIRMWARE UPDATE IS AVAILABLE
UPDATE NOW
REMIND ME LATER
SCHEDULE DATE AND TIME
TURN OFF NOTIFICATION
FIRMWARE UPDATE OK?
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CANCELSET
N
•
Select SCHEDULE DATE AND TIME to automatically turn the
camera on on the speci ed date and time and update.
•
Select REMIND ME LATER to display the con rmation screen 3
days later.
•
Select TURN OFF NOTIFICATION to display no con rmation
screen.
364
Technical Notes
12
Firmware Updates
3
Select OK.
4
Follow the instructions on the screen to update the fi rmware.
5
When the update completion screen is displayed, turn the cam-
era off .
O
•
Use a battery with a su cient charge to update the rmware. Do
not turn o or operate the camera during an update. If the camera
is turned o during a rmware update, the camera may no longer
operate normally.
•
Nothing will be displayed on the EVF during a rmware update. Use
the LCD monitor.
•
The time required for a rmware update depends on the size of the
rmware. At most, it may take about 10 minutes.
•
It is not possible to return to a previous version after the rmware has
been updated.
•
If an error message appears while the rmware is being updated, re-
fer to the following website.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en-int/manual/error_message_recovery/
Checking the Firmware Version
To see the version information, turn on the camera while pressing the
DISP/BACK button.
O
The camera will only display the rmware version if a memory card is
inserted.
N
To view the rmware version or update rmware for optional accesso-
ries such as shoe-mounted ash units, mount the accessories on the
camera.
365
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t nd the solution here, con-
tact your local Fuji lm distributor.
Power and Battery
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera does not
turn on.
•
The battery was not charged before rst use: The battery is not
charged at shipment. Charge the battery before fi rst use
(P 42).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
•
The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-
entation (P 38).
•
The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 38).
The monitor does not
turn on.
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off
and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
The battery runs down
quickly.
•
The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-
et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-
mediately before taking a picture.
•
There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth.
•
ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF off (P 148).
•
The battery has been charged many times: The battery has
reached the end of its charging life. Purchase a new bat-
tery.
366
Technical Notes
12
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera turns o
suddenly.
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
fully-charged spare battery (P 42).
The camera does not
turn o .
The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
(P 11).
Charging does not start
(USB).
•
Insert the camera battery (P 38).
•
Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation
(P 38).
•
Confi rm that the camera is connected to the computer
(P 42).
•
If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake
the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB ca-
ble (P 42).
Charging does not start
(battery charger).
•
Insert the battery.
•
Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
•
Make sure that the charger is correctly plugged in.
•
Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
charger.
Charging is slow. Charge the battery at room temperature.
367
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery
does not charge.
•
There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth (P 38).
•
The battery has been charged many times: The battery has
reached the end of its charging life. Purchase a new bat-
tery. If the battery still fails to charge, contact your Fujifi lm
dealer (P 344).
The power supply icon is
not displayed.
Confi rm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is se-
lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.
Menus and Displays
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Display is not in English.
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING> Qa
(P 49, 273).
368
Technical Notes
12
Shooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
No picture is taken
when the shutter
button is pressed.
•
The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 38, 220).
•
The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card
in the camera (P 270).
•
There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
with a soft, dry cloth.
•
The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
(P 38).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
•
The camera has turned o automatically: Turn the camera on
(P 45).
Mottling (“noise”)
appears in the monitor
or view nder when
the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the
displays. Images taken with the camera are unaff ected.
The camera does not
focus.
•
The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or man-
ual focus (P 97).
•
The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 84).
369
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
No panorama is recorded
when the shutter button
is pressed.
The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a
panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns off (P 11).
No face is detected.
•
The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or
other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 149).
•
The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:
Change the composition so that the subject’s face occu-
pies a larger area of the frame (P 149).
•
The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-
ject to face the camera (P 149).
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is o : Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 149).
•
The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
•
The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
No subject is detected.
•
The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible
(P 151).
•
The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame
(P 151).
•
OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 151).
•
The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
370
Technical Notes
12
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The ash does not re.
•
The ash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 173).
•
The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 168).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
•
The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 9).
Some ash modes are
not available.
OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON (P 275).
The ash does not fully
light the subject.
•
The subject is not in range of the ash: Position the subject in
range of the fl ash.
•
The ash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
•
Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 70, 75, 386).
371
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Pictures are blurred.
•
The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
•
The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens
(P 53).
•
s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-
played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 54).
Pictures are mottled.
•
Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
*
Use pixel
mapping (P 134).
* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting
with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various col-
ors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.
•
The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:
Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 45,
381).
•
A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and
wait for it to cool down (P 45, 381).
372
Technical Notes
12
Playback
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Pictures are grainy.
The pictures were taken with a diff erent make or model of
camera.
Playback zoom is
unavailable.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a diff erent
make or model of camera.
No sound in movie
playback.
•
Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume
(P 280).
•
The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
during recording.
•
The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.
•
OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON
(P 275).
Selected pictures are not
deleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Remove protection using the device with which it was
originally applied (P 224).
Pictures remain after
ERASE> ALL FRAMES is
selected.
File numbering is
unexpectedly reset.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the cam-
era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 306).
373
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Connections
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The monitor is blank.
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 56).
Both the TV and camera
monitor are blank.
E
E
EYE SENSOR is selected for VIEW MODE SETTING>
PLAYBACK: Put your eye to the viewfi nder or choose a
diff erent VIEW MODE SETTING option (P 20).
No picture or sound
on TV.
•
The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 56).
•
Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
(P 56).
•
The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-
vision to adjust the volume (P 56).
The computer does not
recognize the camera.
Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected
(P 247).
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
or FUJIFILM X Acquire
fails to correctly detect
the camera.
Check the option selected for CONNECTION MODE
on the camera. Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP
RESTORE before connecting the USB cable (P 267).
374
Technical Notes
12
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Cannot connect to
iPhones or iPads.
POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER
SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected
via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply
power (P 246).
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
Con rm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure
for connecting the camera varies with the type of connec-
tor with which the smartphone is equipped (P 244).
Wireless Transfer
For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connec-
tions, visit:
https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
The camera is slow
to connect or upload
pictures to the
smartphone.
Upload fails or is
interrupted.
•
The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer
(P 240).
•
Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-
era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cord-
less phones (P 240).
375
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Cannot upload images.
•
The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-
phone and camera can connect to only one device at a
time. End the connection and try again (P 240).
•
There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting
again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make
connection diffi cult (P 240).
•
The image was created on another device: The camera may
not be able to upload images created on other devices.
•
The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In
addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in
formats they do not support.
Smartphone will not
display pictures.
Select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING>
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE. Selecting OFF
increases upload times for larger images; in addition,
some phones may not display images over a certain size
(P 263).
376
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera is unre-
sponsive.
•
Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the
battery (P 38).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
•
The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connec-
tion.
•
The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
to unlock the controls (P 17, 19).
The camera does not
function as expected.
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 38). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujifi lm dealer.
No sound.
•
Adjust the volume (P 277).
•
OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON
(P 275).
Pressing the Qbutton
does not display the
quick menu.
TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 174).
377
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
i (red)
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged
spare battery.
j (blinks red)
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery.
s (displayed in red with
red focus frame)
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-
other subject at the same distance, then recompose the
picture.
Aperture or shutter
speed displayed in red
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
over- or under-exposed. Use the fl ash for additional light-
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off , remove the lens,
and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
LENS CONTROL ERROR
TURN OFF THE CAMERA
AND TURN ON AGAIN
CARD NOT INITIALIZED
•
The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been
formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING> FORMAT.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
378
Technical Notes
12
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
CARD ERROR
•
The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-
mat the card.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card
is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the
message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-
sists, replace the card.
•
Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
PROTECTED CARD The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
BUSY
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
b MEMORY FULL
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
379
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
WRITE ERROR
•
Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or
turn the camera off and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
•
Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
•
The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
•
The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
•
The memory card write speed is slow: When recording mov-
ies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
FRAME NO. FULL
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and
select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then
select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..
380
Technical Notes
12
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
READ ERROR
•
The le is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The fi le
cannot be viewed.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
PROTECTED FRAME
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected
picture. Remove protection and try again.
CAN NOT CROP
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
DPOF FILE ERROR
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-
ry card and create a second print order.
CAN NOT SET DPOF The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
F CAN NOT SET DPOF
Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT ROTATE The selected picture cannot be rotated.
F CAN NOT ROTATE
Movies cannot be rotated.
381
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
F CANNOT EXECUTE
The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the
picture was recorded with a diff erent model of camera.
m CANNOT EXECUTE
p (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
STANDARD
TEMPERATURE LIMIT
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature al-
lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the
camera off and wait for it to cool.
p (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
HIGH TEMPER-
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
HOLD CAMERA FOR
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature
allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
burns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
p (red)
HIGH TEMPERATURE
LIMIT REACHED
SHUTTING DOWN
The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and
the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the cam-
era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pic-
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
382
Technical Notes
12
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or number
of pictures available at di erent image sizes. All gures are
approximate; le size varies with the scene recorded, pro-
ducing wide variations in the number of les that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
Capacity
Capacity
T
T
SD memory cards
SD memory cards
32GB
32GB
FINE
FINE
NORMAL
NORMAL
Photos
Photos
O
O
3
3
∶
∶
2
2
1330 1990
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) 360
RAW
RAW
(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
680
Movies
Movies
*
*
V
V
2160
2160
77 minutes
W
W
1080
1080
77 minutes
* Assumes default bit rate.
O
•
The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the
settings selected (P 64).
•
Depending on the bit rate, shots saved to memory cards with a capacity
of 32 GB or less may be recorded across multiple les without interruption.
The same is true of shots over an hour in length, independent of the bit
rate and memory card capacity.
383
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Model FUJIFILM X100VI
Product Number FF230003
E ective pixels Approx. 40.2 million
Image sensor 23.5 mm× 15.7 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS 5 HR sensor with
primary color fi lter
Storage media Fujifi lm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
Memory card slots SD memory card slot (UHS-I compliant)
File system
•
Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0
•
Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compli-
ant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)
•
Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)
•
Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, and H.264
•
Audio (including voice memos):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only)
384
Technical Notes
12
System
Image size
O
3∶2 (
7728 × 5152
)
O 4∶3 (6864 × 5152)
O 16∶9 (7728 × 4344) O 5∶4 (6432 × 5152)
O 1∶1 (5152 × 5152)
P
3∶2 (
5472 × 3648
)
P 4∶3 (4864 × 3648)
P 16∶9 (5472 × 3080) P 5∶4 (4560 × 3648)
P 1∶1 (3648 × 3648)
Q
3∶2 (
3888 × 2592
)
Q 4∶3 (3456 × 2592)
Q 16∶9 (3888 × 2184) Q 5∶4 (3264 × 2592)
Q 1∶1 (2592 × 2592)
RAW (7728 × 5152) TIFF (7728 × 5152)
O
panorama
: vertical (2160 × 9600)/horizontal (9600 × 1440)
P
panorama
: vertical (2160 × 6400)/horizontal (6400 × 1440)
Lens
•
Type: FUJINON fi xed focal length lens
•
Focal length: f=23mm (35 mm format equivalent: 35mm)
•
Maximum aperture: F2.0
Sensitivity
•
Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO125 – 12800 in increments of ⁄EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 64, 80, 100, 25600, or 51200
•
Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO125 – 12800
in increments of ⁄EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-
alent to ISO 25600
Metering 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation
•
Still pictures: −5EV – +5EV in increments of ⁄EV
•
Movies: −2EV – +2EV in increments of ⁄EV
385
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Shutter speed
•
MECHANICAL SHUTTER
⁃ Modes P and A: 30s to ¼ s
⁃ Time: 15min. to ¼ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60min.
•
ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
⁃ Modes P and A: 30s to ⁄s
⁃ Time: 15min. to ⁄s
⁃ Bulb: Fixed at 1s
•
MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
⁃ Modes P and A: 30s to ⁄s
⁃ Time: 15min. to ⁄s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
O
The shutter speed ranges for continuous mode may
di er from those listed here.
Continuous
CONTINUOUS MODE
CONTINUOUS MODE
Available frame advance rates
Available frame advance rates
(JPEG)
(JPEG)
20fps(1.29X CROP)
20fps(1.29X CROP)
1
1
20
13fps(1.29X CROP)
13fps(1.29X CROP)
1
1
13
10fps(1.29X CROP)
10fps(1.29X CROP)
1
1
10
11fps
11fps
2
2
11
8.0fps
8.0fps
3
3
8.0
6.0fps
6.0fps 6.0
5.0fps
5.0fps 5.0
4.0fps
4.0fps 4.0
3.0fps
3.0fps 3.0
1 Available with electronic shutter only.
2 13fps with electronic shutter.
3 8.9fps with electronic shutter.
O
The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-
ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.
386
Technical Notes
12
System
Focus
•
Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
•
Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/
phase-detection AF)
•
Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balance Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sun-
light, shade, daylight fl uorescent, warm white fl uorescent,
cool white fl uorescent, incandescent, underwater
Self-timer
•
Still pictures: Off , 2 sec., 10 sec.
•
Movies: Off , 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec.
Flash
•
Type: Auto fl ash
•
E ective range (ISO1600): Approx. 0.3m – 7.4m/1.0ft. – 24ft.
Flash mode
•
MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, COMMANDER, OFF
•
SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN
•
RED
EYE
REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
Hot shoe Provided (supports TTL fl ash control)
Sync contact X contact
Sync terminal —
Optical view nder
(OVF)
Reverse Galilean viewfi nder with electronic bright frame dis-
play and approx. 0.52× magnifi cation; frame coverage approx.
95%
Electronic view nder
(EVF)
0.5-in., 3690k-dot OLED viewfi nder; magnifi cation 0.66× with
50mm lens (35mm format equivalent) at infi nity and diopter
set to −1.0 m
−1
; diagonal angle of view approximately 32°
(horizontal angle of view approximately 27°)
•
Diopter adjustment: −4 to +2m
−1
•
Eyepoint: Approximately 16.8mm
LCD monitor 3.0-in/7.6cm, 1620k-dot color touchscreen LCD monitor,
tilting
387
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Movies
(with stereo sound)
•
Movie size: J 16:9,
T
16∶9,
W
17∶9, V 16∶9, 1 17∶9,
W 16∶9, W 17∶9
•
Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P
•
Recording/output format:
- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 200, 100, or 50 Mbps)
- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 200, 100, or 50Mbps)
- HDMI output supported (8-bit 4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
High-speed movies
•
Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
•
Frame advance rate: 240P, 200P, 120P, 100P
Input/output terminals
Microphone connector
⌀2.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Headphone jack socket
The USB connector can be converted to a headphone jack
socket using a USB Type-C to ⌀3.5 mm stereo mini-pin jack
adapter cable compatible with analog audio I/O (USB Type-C
Audio Adapter Accessory Mode)
Remote release connector
⌀2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector: USB Type-C® USB 10 Gbps
HDMI output HDMI Micro connector (type D)
388
Technical Notes
12
Power supply/other
Power supply NP-W126S rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
•
Battery type: NP-W126S
•
Flash: Disabled
•
Shooting mode: Mode P
Number of shots
Number of shots
PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE
LCD
LCD
EVF
EVF
OVF
OVF
BOOST
1
1
Approx. 310 Approx. 270 Approx. 400
NORMAL Approx. 320 Approx. 310 Approx. 450
ECONOMY Approx. 380 Approx. 360 Approx. 450
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
a single charge
a single charge
Mode
Mode
Actual battery life
Actual battery life
of movie capture
of movie capture
Continuance
Continuance
battery life of
battery life of
movie capture
movie capture
V
2
2
Approx. 45minutes Approx. 70minutes
W
2
2
Approx. 50minutes Approx. 85minutes
High-speed movies
3
3
Approx. 55minutes −
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (100P) selected EVF/LCD
BOOST SETTING.
2 At a frame rate of 59.94fps.
3 At a frame rate of 120fps.
CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and
the fi gures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-
ance will decline at low temperatures.
389
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
Power supply/other
Camera size
(W × H × D)
128.0 mm× 74.8 mm× 55.3 mm (33.2 mm excluding projections,
measured at thinnest part)/5.04 in.× 2.94 in.× 2.18 in. (1.31 in.)
Camera weight Approx. 471 g/16.6 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and
memory card
Shooting weight Approx. 521 g/18.4 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions
•
Temperature: 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to
+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)
•
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency
(center frequency)
•
Indonesia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
•
USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)
•
European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New
zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan, Israel
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency
(center frequency)
2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz
390
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
NP-W126S rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage 7.2 V
Nominal capacity 1260 mAh
Operating
temperature
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
36.4 mm× 47.1 mm× 15.7 mm/1.4 in.× 1.9 in.× 0.6 in.
Weight Approx. 47 g/1.7 oz.
O
Speci cations and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fuji lm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may di er from that described in this
manual.
391
MEMO
7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN
https://fujifilm-x.com
